Home

User Manual MICROLINE IBM-/EPSON-compatible

1. 2 e M e ee 128 ee eee 64 eeee 32 00000 Byte 3 16 20000 6002229 8 2000000000 000 200000 2000000 1 000000000000 100000000 290000000000 00000000000000000 000000000 199000000000000000000000000000 0900000000 Our example composes 48 columns If the triangle is to be printed six times one after the other the total number of columns is given by 48 i e 288 Since each graphic column consists of 3 graphic bytes the values for n and n in the example graphic with 288 columns are 1 mode byte 288 columns 3 graphic bytes per column 865 bytes From this are computed n and n as follows n integer component number of bytes 256 in the example n 3 n number of bytes n x 256 in the example n 97 11 5 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Programming graphics When entering the program lines beginning with REM can be left out and the DATA instructions compiled in longer lines When programming graphics do not add superfluous line feed commands If you enter a semicolon after the data transferred in an LPRINT instruction the print head will remain in the respective line Remember in addition that BASIC assigns to all printers a maxi mum line le
2. GROUP ITEM SET Rear Feed Line Spacing 6 LPI 8 LPI Form Tear Off Off 500 ms 1 sec 2 sec Skip Over Perforation No Yes Page Width 13 6 8 Page Length 12 14 17 3 3 5 4 55 6 7 85 11 112 3 Bottom Feed Line Spacing 6 LPI 8 LPI Form Tear Off Off 500 ms 1 sec 2 sec Skip Over Perforation No Yes Page Width 13 6 8 Page Length 12 14 17 3 3 5 4 55 6 7 85 11 112 3 Top Feed Line Spacing 6 LPI 8 LPI Bottom Margin Valid Invalid Page Width 13 6 8 Page Length 11 2 3 12 14 16 57 3 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 8 8 5 11 Wait Time 1sec 2 sec 500 ms Page Length Control by MENU Setting by Actual Page Length The menu item Page Width appears only for wide printer models The menu item Page Width appears only for wide printer models The menu item Page Width appears only for wide printer models Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Auto CR appears only when IBM emulation is selected CSF Bin Select appears only when cut sheet feeder is installed with two trays SI Select Pitch 10 12 cpi appears only when IBM emulation is selected MODE2 appears only for wide printer models CSF Type appears only for wide printer models GROUP ITEM SET Set Up Graphics Uni directional
3. GROUP ITEM SET Printer Control Emulation Mode EPSON LQ IBM PPR IBM AGM Font Print Mode LQ Courier LQ Roman LQ Swiss LQ Swiss Bold LQ Orator LQ Gothic LQ Prestige Utility Pitch 10 CPI 12 CPI 15 CPI 17 1 CPI 20 CPI Proportional Spacing No Yes Style Normal Italics Size Single Double Symbol Sets Character Set Set II Set I Language Set ASCII French German British Danish I Swedish I Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin American French Canadian Dutch Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkish Swiss I Swiss II Publisher Zero Character Unlashed Slashed Code Page USA Canada French Multilingual Portugal Norway Turkey Greek_437 Greek_869 Greek_928 Greek_437 Cyprus Polska Mazovia Serbocroatic I Serbocroatic II ECMA 94 Hungarian CWI Windows Greek Windows East Europe Windows Cyrillic East Europe Latin 852 Cyrillic 1 855 Cyrillic 866 Kamenicky MJK ISO Latin 2 Hebrew NC 862 Hebrew OC Turkey_857 Latin 5 Windows Turkey Windows Hebrew Ukrainian Bulgarian ISO Latin 6 8859 10 Windows Baltic Baltic_774 Slashed Letter No Yes Chapter 4 Printer menu settings
4. Windows Greek 12345678 9 ID 1020 0 0 P 1 4 1 0 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 00 2 je 2 B R b r AJ B 6 Epson 1B 52 32 3 s 3 c lsc sif riy 4 11 5 41 6 7 5 GI 5 El U e u v 6 4 amp 6 4 2 e 7 8 8 TIC 8 H X h x 9 1 y gt 117112 lt IA UO Latin 5 Windows Turkish D ID 1021 1 60 4 1 A Q IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 FD 00 2 let 2 r el Epson 18 52 33 lvlulalalelslelslr 4 t n 5 _ 5 E U e u 6 6 F V 5 7 7 G w s w x 8 X n x s 9 o 1 Y A B lt lt gt o 9 lt a S IBN E n S 10 Y B B 14 Appendix Code pages
5. mg 42 5 67 Blc p E F OCR B1 0 O P p 1 Ella 1 6 05 ET 5 P ol gl rr Epson 1B 6B 05 3 5 5 l lt 4 4 laji L gt 5 5 6 amp l 7 7 G W e 8 ila oil 9 j 9 I1I Y il yl A JZ jl z o B 1 5 C lt gt N e VR 1 1 1 0 21 Appendix Bar codes Appendix C Bar codes The bar code was developed as an automated identification system This chapter only describes for simplifying warehouse and stock taking procedures The quali 70010 use the printer ty of the bar code is superior to OCR A and OCR B as the quality of 77419 Bar code printings OCR A and OCR B may be affected by external influences The following factors may influence the readability of bar codes the print process and the sharpness of the stripes the status of the printer and of the print head the quality of the pins and the pin mechanism use of a multicoloured ribbon its age and colour intensity e functionality of the device used
6. 12 Appendix Code pages 415 C D EJ F A 4 B O cis 15 T a 6 E U F V 6 G w H xX 9 I Y 9 J Z Dr afm 1 Y N olL 2 4 5 A B C EF J P 1 0 4 A Q 2 B 3 CS L 4 q D T 5 5 E U l 6 amp q l l o l 7 G w 8 9 Y a gt J Z 5 S s E B lt K gt a 9 ye L M 7 1 x Toc G Y _ ECMA 94 ID 1018 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 FA Epson 1B 52 2A Windows East Europe ID 1019 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 FB Epson 1B 52 31 00 00 B 13 Appendix Code pages
7. 3145 8 9 A B C DJ E F 0 e P 55 1 A 2 B R 1 5 J ilr y ri y 4 DI T r jH o 5 B dE Xl x 6 ah uc 8 H X m N I 17 lt gt 0 BI a lt 5 7 j b M K K 5 3 gt O o m sE o liu 1 012345 8 9 A B C D E F 0 P 1 1 11 2 2 B R gt 5 lt 4 1115 14 zx 5 415 5 64 amp 6 7 H x IR gt J Z lt i ce 5 dar y C a lt LI me M YV ill E 3 gt Windows Cyrillic ID 1022 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 FE 00 Epson 1B 52 34 Hungarian CWI ID 1024 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 00 00 Epson 1B 52 36 B 15 Appendix Code pages Ukrainian ID 1027 Td 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D EF 0 0 P p A P a L H op IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 03 00 i
8. 712 B NIU lt L 1 i il a elm ai D fy gt N A S Y qr 2 0 lo Als 1 Cyrillic ID 855 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 57 00 Epson 1B 52 2C Turkish 857 ID 857 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 Epson 1B 52 39 B 5 Appendix Code pages Portugese ID 860 1 2 314 5 6 7 8 9 AJB C D 0 P p IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 5C 00 ile 1 q 3 EE Epson 1B 52 1C 2 2 B R b r r m r gt i43 5 s lt 4 a pl T a t 1 f 5 s E U eluja o 6 amp 6 F V f v HH 7 7 G wis w t 8 IO s Hx 9 E _ gt J Z j z lt c K k H vy 9 1 1 6 1 m 101 gt N A n P lt se e F 7 French Canadian ID 863 e 324 s e z s sas 0 0 P H IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 5F 00 1 1
9. Protocol Ready Busy Diagram 3 Ready Busy Line printer SSD Host Printer Menu Settings SD SSD 3 SD SSD 21 RD SD 4 RD SD 22 RS RD 6 RS RD 24 CS RS 7 CS RS 25 GND CS 9 AYAY CS 27 DM 11 DM 29 TR 12 TR 30 GND 19 HRY YRYAR Serial I F Option Protocol Ready Busy Busy Line SSD DSR Signal Invalid D 17 Appendix D Interface Data Diagram 4 Protocol Ready Busy Ready Busy Line printer RS Host Printer Menu Settings T2 Spe ee Serial I F Option Protocol Ready Busy SD SSD 21 Busy Line RTS RD Et DSRSignal Invalid RD SD 22 RS RD 6 gt RS RD 24 gt 4 RS 7 lt CS RS 25 2 GND CS 9 j 5 x gt um DM 3 T1 4 30 GND 19 k mE Diagram 5 Protocol X ON X OFF Printer status line SD Host Printer Menu Settings as SD SSD 3 Zi Serial I F Option Protocol SD SSD 21 Busy Line lt 2 er DSRSignal Invalid S TRD SD 22 RS RD 6 gt RS RD 24 gt CS 5 7 CS RS 25 GND Cor 9 7 cs 27 gt DM J TR 32 a TR 30 GND 19 ee D 18 Appendix D Interface Data Protocol Ready Busy Ready Busy Line printer SD TR
10. Protocol Ready Busy X ON X OFF Diagnostic Test No Yes Busy Line SSD SSD DTR RTS Baud Rate 9600 BPS 4800 BPS 2400 BPS 1200 BPS 600 BPS 300 BPS 19200 BPS DSR Signal Valid Invalid Signal Ready on Power Up Ready on Select Busy Time 200 ms 1 sec Auto Feed XT appears only when Epson emulation is selected 4 7 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings The menu items of group CSF Bin 1 listed below appear only when a cut sheet feeder is installed The menu items of the group CSF Bin 2 accordingly appear only when a cut sheet feeder is installed with two trays GROUP ITEM SET CSF Bin 1 Line Spacing 6 LPI 8 LPI 21 Bottom Margin Valid Invalid Page Width appears only for Page Width 13 6 8 wide printer model Page Length 1125 12 14 16 57 5 5 56 9 2 8 8 5 11 CSF Bin 2 Line Spacing 6 LPI 8 LPI Bottom Margin Valid Invalid Page Length 1125 12 14 16 57 3 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 8 8 5 11 4 8 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Explanation of menu items Emulation Mode You use this item to define the command set The emulations available to you are Epson LQ IBM ProPrinter and The Alternative Graphics Mode AGM includes partial compatibility with the Epson LQ series which is largely limited to graphics and line feed
11. 1 Ole 1 1 L T 5 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F8 00 2 ej 2 ms Epson 1B 52 18 3 lt 1 l Ey 5 6 s E U eu o 3 F oJ 6 4 iul 7 7 T i d lt 8 silu x h x y 9140 41 911 Y i y 1 _ A gt 1 2 2 0 1 lt IL pijd s g d D o M lm e u 1 0 E Dia gt H ae F f 1 m o Serbo Croatic Il amp Tol 1 2 73 4 5 6 7 8 9 AlBICIDIE F I D 1 01 7 0 p 1 4 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F9 00 2 e 2 T T r gt Epson 1B 52 19 3 lt 4 415 ap rT a 1 5 5 215 Flo J 6 4 amp fv a H E 7 le 8 5 lt jal o 9 i y Z O Alif 1272 2 2 0 lt 5 9 lt 1 4 a eo D 1 gt H i E Dla N l lnj lA Pj dJ e F
12. 8 tric 8 H X hx 1 a 9 1 9111 1Y i d li d 2 3 5 v 9 F mi D oe E lola gt N a n on x di mel s F O o milo vj l m 2 3 415 6 7 8 9 Greek 928 1009 0 0 P 1 a Kaka o 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F1 00 2 2 B 5 1 52 27 3 amp 3 lC lSl c slal r E vy oc 4 l4 D T d t 5 5 5 6 amp 6 F 7 7 7 15 H X m X 8 18 H X hix y 9 l9 J1 Y e lH I Ol A J z j z TIK fe B C lt 1 gt aR o 9 Appendix Code pages Greek 437 Cyprus ID 1011 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F3 00 Epson 1B 52 29 Turkish ID 1012 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F4 00 Epson 1B 52 1D a 0 31415 8 9 A B C ID E F 0 A P
13. A transparent ribbon guard is fitted to the front of the cassette Do not remove it 1 Take the ribbon out of the plastic wrapping 2 Open the printer cover and move the print head to the middle of the plat en 3 Place the cassette onto the cassette holder with the cutouts fitting onto the pins Insert ribbon cassette here Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up 4 Tilt the cassette carefully down over the print head until you feel it click into place 5 Turn the blue transport knob of the cassette in the direc tion of the arrow to tension the ribbon 6 Close the cover of the print Tilt down the cassette and tension ribbon The paper support The paper support with its guide rails enables the paper to be fed precisely into the printer 1 Hold the support horizontal ly with the pegs on the sup port precisely aligned with the cutouts 4 P in the case of the printer 2 Press the support down wards on both sides until you feel it click into position Fitting the paper support Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Raising the paper support 1 Slightly raise the paper support at the back 2 Pull the support forwards and slide it at this angle to its end position 3 Align the guide rails so that they just touch the edges of the paper A mark is provided on the left side of the paper sup port against which
14. Epson 1B 52 2B 2 e gt r rir e 4 16 1915 14 p T 11 5 51 5 E 4 6 _ o Hi F 7 7 G W g H 8 7i 1 o 120 lt l HB v 9 2 E gt JS F Appendix Code pages 365 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 A BI CI D E F 0 o gt 0 P 4 E 1 4 1 le L 2 2 B b gt 3 lt ap 5 s 5 Flo J 6 F v 7 7 G 8 s iH x 9 o 4 9 t Y i gt J Z j HI dL B d H C lt LI 1 1 4 dm 010 lola A on Ale e x 1123456 8 9 A BICI ID E F 0 P 0 P A P
15. 0 Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper 5 4 AP B Mx 2 SP1 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 ange Ready Busy XON XOFF A AB Centronics Blocked Duplex Diagram 10 Diagram 11 D 31 Appendix D Interface Data Diagram 12 Connection 3 wire Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop Printer Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper SP4 9 D 9 E SEA xS Ready Busy XON XOFF 4 SP1 rae Centronics Blocked Duplex ai o dr D B 1 SP3 18 19 SPA 5 5 vet GND7 THESE Diagram 13 Connection 2 wire Power source receive loop none Power source send loop Host Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper SP4 A B y gt 0 9 A K sj 5 1 DE Centronics Blocked Duplex D 10 SP2 475 SP3 ono SP5 0 4 r SP4 AB 18 SP5 2 B 19 GND7 cL In combination with this circuit you can only use the Centronics Blocked Duplex protocol in order to ensure the correct transmission of data D 32 Appendix D Interface Data Connection 2 wire Diagram 14 Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop No
16. 33 34 35 amp 40 11 6 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics 100 REM 96 3 state the number of graphic bytes 6 48 3 864 96 3 256 110 FOR I 1 6 REM Repeat triangle pattern 6 times 120 FOR J 1 TO 48 REM Triangle consists of 48 columns 130 READ A B C REM 3 bytes for each column 140 PRINT 1 CHRS A CHRS B CHRS C REM Send to printer 150 EXT J 160 RESTORE 170 EXT I PRINT 1 13 10 10 REM Next triangle 180 EX ODE 190 DATA 05 0 Lr 05 0 15 200 0 0 0 0 63 0 0 127 0 0 255 210 0 1 2555105 935 255 0 Hp 255 10 15 255 220 DATA 0 32 2557 70 63 2557 0 5 127 7255 0 255 255 230 DATA 1 255 255 63 255 255 I27 255 255 299 255 255 240 DATA 31 255 255 63 255 255 127 255 255 255 255 255 250 DATA 255 255 255 127 255 255 63 255 255 31 255 255 260 DATA 15 2259 25997 ly 2509 2507 3 255 255 1 255 255 270 DATA 0 255 255 0 X21 255 0 63 5 255 0 31 255 280 DATA 0 15 255 0 7 255 0 Sy 255 0 1 255 290 DATA 0 255 0 0 127 0 0 63 0 0 31 300 DATA 0y 10 15 Q0 Oy 0 0 33 0 310 END The program outputs to the printer 4 lines each of 6 triangles in the different graphic densities 11 7 C
17. MICROLINE 3390 3391 IBM EPSON compatible User Manual Accessories 7 Roll Paper Stand narrow version only Bottom Tractor narrow wide version Tractor feet Cut Sheet Feeder CSF 1 Bin 2 Bin narrow wide version Serial Interfaces Cards RS 232C RS 232C Current Loop Pull Tractor narrow wide version RS 422A II Legal note The information contained in this manual is as complete accurate and up to date as possible Provided legally permissible we shall accept no liability for consequential damage in connection with the use of this manual Otherwise we shall only be liable for intent or gross negligence We make no guarantee that alterations to the soft ware programs and devices of other manufacturers referred to in this manual will not affect the usability of the information con tained in this manual The author reserves all rights The manual may not be duplicated completely or in part in whatever form without the consent of the author The content of this manual is subject to alteration without notice Please also read the information following the table of contents HI Guidance through the manual The first part of this manual is directed largely at users who have no or very little technical knowledge Experienced users suppliers and technicians will find additional technical information in the Programming part and in the appendices There are thr
18. 1 1 2 e 2 B gt 5 AY u l jll lt 4 4 DI T 1 _ 5 5 Fri J 6 2 6 FIV 7 7 G W Olaja n j H 8 jd 8 H X 9 o 9 I Y JZ Aly os B K I 5 H 9 Eds X Nilelo F n 19 3 gt o n x d lo _ 5 Lu 0 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 A BI C DIE F 0 0 P 1 096 4 1 A Q 2 2 B R gt xz lt 4 q 4 D T 2 5 8 15 5 Flo J 6 6 H u 7 7 G Ww fu se l lt H X 9 gt 117 T o lt K v 9 lt F 2 E 2144 gt N Als tle 1 10 Appendix Code pages zt 3145678 Polska Mazovia 0 gt L 1 e l1lAlolalqlale z L r ID 101 4 2 s gt IBM 1B5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F6 00 3 w n 3 CS 0 LL x
19. 4 D 1 f 5 51215 I 1 F J 6 6 F 7 lel cl m I id 5 8 T C 8 H ely lal L i 9 9 71 4d gt J 0 ye 9 K il l o Y c EXP lt L ul i _ dij 5 E lola gt N Pt ol v 2 0 23 A 8 9 D F gt 1 lt 1 T 2 2 E T gt v lt 4 1 4 D 4 f 5 8 9 5 E 4 F J 6 lal 6 F H F H 7 e t 7 6 cl T I d 8 1 9 9 71 a fr gt J K 1 Y c 9 lt L D gt 2 E lola gt A Pt 5 QE 13 6 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets This table shows the ASCII chararcter and the corresponding cha racter that is replaced with when an alternative language character is selected by menu or command Hexadecimal Value Character Set 40 4F 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 N N 4 N o 5 A ASCII 0 ASCII 0 British German o French Swedish I Danish Norwegian Dutch Italian OR OR OR P OR Goo De mu E E C HH H 52 2 02 32S Qu GO o 35 B XQ oux ox French Can
20. Furthermore the following characteristics of the labels influence the readability of bar codes reflection smoothness of surface transparency surface s consistency colour age of labels gt Note For further information about design and safety procedures used with bar codes see the books Codiertechnik Der Schl ssel zum Strichcode by B Lenk and H G Hansen published by Ident or The Bar Code Book Reading Printing and Specification of Bar Code Symbols by Roger C Palmer published by Helmers Publishing Inc Appendix Bar codes We do not guarantee that bar codes printed with these commands can be read by all bar code readers Before you use these commands we recommend that you test whether your bar code reader can read the printed bar codes Bar Code Types You can print seven different types of bar codes The bar codes are selected by the command sequences listed below The command sequences are EAN Codes gt 8 8 8 gt 13 IAN13 JAN13 UPC Codes gt UPC A gt UPC E Code 39 Code 128 Interleaved 2 5 ZIP Code gt ZIP Code Bar Code With all bar codes except the bar code UPC E it is possible to calcu late and print a checksum Because of the 24 dot matrix printing technique the smallest bar code size that can be printed is a Low Density Code and or an en largement factor of 1 35 EAN UPC and Code 128 type bar codes can be enlarg
21. M a9 I Dia gt N A FIG Y O 1 Bulgarian ID 1072 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 30 00 Epson 1B 52 48 B 19 Appendix Code pages Special character set OCR B1 The listed code pages show the different character sets that are avail able in the various printer s typefaces For example Codepage 437 USA can be printed in Roman Swiss Courier etc In contrast to that the selection of OCR characters Optical Character Recognition defines the character set as well as the typeface The OCR Code contains fixed characters which can be read and proc essed by every OCR scanner In Letter Quality LQ you can select OCR B1 character sets a deriv ative of the OCR A typeface and easy to read Function Dec Hex ASCII Select OCR B1 27 107 5 1 6805 ESC k ENQ Although the OCR typeface is available in various pitches readibil ity is only given in 10 cpi The actual error free readibility of typefaces like OCR A OCR B or Barcodes EAN UPC Zip is influenced by the printing process resolution sharpness of edge e the technical quality of the printer the quality of the print medium toner ribbon e the quality of the printing material shine smoothness coating age reflection surface s consistency the technical quality of the scanner B 20 Appendix Code pages
22. When the printer is switched on tabulators are set automatically every eight columns starting at the ninth column If a tabulator cha racter HT is transmitted the print head moves to the next set tab position before printing the following character The set tabulator position relates to the set left margin relative refe rence The actual position of a tab depends on the actual pitch at the time when loading the horizontal tab When changing the pitch the tabulator position does not move absolute position It is mandatory to enter the tab positions in ascending order The parameter n indicates the column position of the first tab n to n accordingly the column positions of the other tabs to be set Up to 32 n nj tabs can be defined The position of a horizontal tab is relative to the set left margin The command sequence must be ended with a NUL character 14 9 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Vertical tabulators The command ESC D NUL clears all horizontal tabs including the standard tabs If the printer is switched off and on the standard tabs are available again If no other tab is set up to the end of line the tab skip command is ignored When the printer is switched on the left margin equals the most left position If you change left mar gin the position of the tabulators will change accordingly The maximum permissible values for tab positions can be seen from the following table tabulator
23. e Ifa font other than Courier Roman or Swiss is selected the char acter Np 42 21 points is double width and double hight in reference to point size Np 21 10 5 points e Fixed character pitch 5 lt Pn lt 33 e A character for Np 42 21 points is double hight in reference to point size Np 21 10 5 points The following commands use the pitch set by this command ESC X Set left and right margins BS Backspace ESC D Set horizontal tabs If proportional spacing is selected the pitch is calculated from the following formula for these commands Pitch 360 INT point size 36 10 5 0 5 cpi Printing in UTILITY If a proportional font selected Pn 1 the printer substitutes the Utility font by the chosen font via menu in letter quality Is UTILI TY selected in the printer menu it is substituted by Courier If a fixed pitch is selected the pitches and point sizes are used given in the table of bitmapped character sets above If no point size is entered in this command Lp Hp 0 the point size is selected which was defined previously with this command If the point size is deleted or not set printing takes place with a size of 10 5 points 10 33 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions The following commands are suppressed when this command is used for scaling fonts ESC W double width printing ESC character size line spacing SI condensed printing SO DC4 double width printing for one line If
24. 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command the basic step sizes for the horizontal and ver tical direction can be defined The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of parameters which follow Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 For this command Hn 0 and Ln 1 must be set With Ln Hn 0 this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 1 all Ln Hn 256 1 data following Pn are ignored The parameter Pn specifies the basic step size Pn 360 inch The following table gives the possible values Value of Pn Defined basic step size 0 lt Pn lt 9 no change 10 lt Pn lt 19 1 360 inch 20 lt Pn lt 29 1 180 inch 30 lt Pn lt 39 1 120 inch 40 lt Pn lt 49 1 90 inch 50 lt Pn lt 59 1 72 inch 60 lt Pn lt 69 1 60 inch 70 lt Pn lt 127 no change 14 30 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Commands which use the basic step sizes defined with this com mand and their standard setting ESC set page format 1 360 inch ESC set page length in basic step sizes 1 360 inch ESC absolute horizontal dot position 1 60 inch ESC relative horizontal dot position 1 80 inch LQ 1 120 inch UTL ESC V absolute vertical print position 1 360 inch Vertical print positioning Function Dec Hex ASCII Absolute vertical print positioning Absolute vertical print 27 40 86 1B 28 56 ESC V positioning in units Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn of the basic step size Lp H
25. 3 Make sure the rear paper stands are positioned equal ly between the paper guides Lever guides Chapter 7 Accessories Automatic paper feed Adjust the right paper guide so that the right side of the guide is flush with the right edge of the sheet of paper Do not force the uprights to gether The guide rail can be released and locked again by moving the locking lever to the appropriate position RELEASE LOCK Move the paper set lever of the sheet feeder to the SET position If it is left released the friction rollers cannot grip the paper and if print ing is performed without pa per the print head and plat en can be damaged Make sure the setting of the menu item Page Length matches the paper format you are using Further information on this is to be found in Chapter 4 Printer menu settings In ON LINE mode feed the first sheet of paper with the LF or FF LOAD button If necessary redefine the top of form This is described in Chapter 3 Paper handling To eject a sheet of paper press the FF LOAD button again Do not use the platen knob Chapter 7 Accessories Cut sheets can also be fed into the printer when the cut sheet feeder is installed It is essential however that there is no paper in the normal paper path of the printer There are two possible modes for manual feeding Feeding cut sheets If the printer is
26. 4 8 T 8 H X h x 1 E ISIL R 9 9 1 Y ily e A gt J zZ j z 610 3 IT c lt K k 2 T H o lt C H m y I M l m 2 s Z gt 5 ay 2 0 _ Appendix Code pages Ly 0111234156 8 9 BICID E F 0 0 _ 1 914 1 L Hp n 2 2 b rim 6 4 11514 1 3 5 5 H x I HI 6 amp 6 F V f e Kn X T Hi 7 e 7 G W 8 X h siyle lH l n y 3 o i 9 I Yi i SIYIE 1 F 4 m A gt J Z j lid F 5X um C K k Inio HMH s u 9 lt 1 M m Ijo r i E gt N A n 1 9 J b l1 m N 7 31456 8 9 A B CI D E F 0 0 e P LI 6 1 llA Q a L 2 2 B b E T 3 3 Sal lt H O 4 4 Tx 1 6 4 5 5 o 6 6 F V f 7 g 8 8 H X h ij x 9 9 I Y i
27. A bit map is made up of single dots which can be black or white Bit maps are transmit ted line by line 9 or 24 dot lines each to the printer Its resolution is decisive for the smallest dot size Boldface Characters are printed twice to emphasize them The second printed dot is slightly shifted to the right BS See Backspace Buffer A buffer is a memory area which is reserved mostly temporarily Apart from resident buffers there are variable dynamic buffers Their size is automatically adapted to the re quirements Byte A group of 8 bits combines to one byte from which can represent a character or graphic data A byte can have a value between 0 and 255 F 5 Appendix Index Glossary Carriage Return CR The print head is returned to the beginning of the line Mostly the carriage return is com bined with a line feed to move the print head to the next line Centronics Interface This interface is mainly used to connect com puters and printers The Centronics interface is a parallel interface The eight bits of one byte are transmitted simultaneously via eight data lines Other signal lines control the data transmission handshake Character A character is an element from a defined character set Printable and non printable characters control commands are distin guished Character Set Code Page In a character set all representable charac ters it is determined which chara
28. Print several characters 27 92 1B5C ESC from the all character set n n n n n n 0 to 255 With these commands control characters from the ranges decimal 0 to 31 of IBM character sets I and II and 128 to 159 of IBM character set I can be addressed as printable characters This all character set is called IBM character set III or All Character Set If only one char acter is being printed from the control range ESC is to be used where n has the value of the character to be printed With ESC n n the total number of the characters to be printed from the control range must be defined with the parameters n and n integer value total number of characters 256 n total number of characters n 256 10 22 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions If you want to print fewer than 256 characters you must replace n with the respective number of characters and enter the value 0 for n If more than 256 characters are to be printed you must divide the number of characters to be printed by 256 Then insert the inte ger value for n and the remainder for n If this command is sent the next n n x 256 characters will be printed from the all character sets shown in Appendix B If you want to take the 80 characters from the all character set you must enter the following BASIC instruction LPRINT CHRS 27 CHRS 80 CHRS 0 To print the next 600 characters in this character set you must u
29. With print suppress activated data can continue to be sent to the printer without being stored or printed these data being sup pressed In OFF LINE status in contrast data can be transferred to the printer until the receive buffer is full The printer then signals to the system that it cannot accept any more data The data are thus retained Function Dec Hex ASCII Deactivate end of paper 27 56 1B 38 ESC 8 sensor Activate end of paper 27 57 1B 39 ESC 9 sensor With the end of paper sensor activated the ALARM lamp lights when less than 0 5 inch remains to the end of the paper The printer goes into OFF LINE status At each press of the SEL key a single line is printed and a line feed executed If printing is to be to the lower margin of a sheet the end of paper sensor can be deactivated by the above command The printer then takes the page length set in the menu or by a command to establish an end of paper The end of paper sensor can be reactivated with ESC 9 The function can also be controlled with Paper out Override Print suppress When using the parallel inter face print suppress only func tions if a high level is at pin 36 End of paper sensor 14 25 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Print speed MSB default Function Dec Hex ASCII Select print speed 27 115 1 73 ESC sn n 1 start half print speed n 2 start normal print speed With this command you can reduce the p
30. mined by n If n 0 previous settings will be used If n 2 8 n is set to 7 If EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E or Code 128 is selected n will be ignored Ratio table n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 21 251 3 1 3 51 4 1 4 5 1 5 1 7 selects the print quality of plain writing Appendix Bar codes Table for Selection of Plain Writing n Description No plain uncoded writing 1 LQ character as plain writing The character size of plain writing does not depend on the bar code it is always set to 12 cpi The font of the LQ characters is the same as the font selected for receiving p data Please note that this command does not start the printer The basic settings of this command are nyn 1 0 UPC A nyn 0 9 135 180 inch n 1 1 72 inch n 1 1 72 inch n 1 25 1 n 2 LO Tables 1 through to 7 are used to calculate the width of the bar code If the bar code to be printed extends beyond the right margin of the printing material the print command will be ignored Please refer to tables 1 and 2 for determining the width of the Codes EAN UPC and Code 128 Tables 3 through to 7 are reserved for Code 39 and Interleaved 2 5 Table 1 shows the ratio between n and the maximum width of a bar code character in combination with the bar code type Appendix Bar codes The width of the space element is listed below the width of the black elements Table 1 n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EANS
31. top margin in 1 1400 inch increments m 256 The parameters p and p defines the bottom margin distance from the top of form to the top edge of the bottom margin The unit is n 1440 inch The calculation follows the above listed formula The bottom margin is the distance from the top of form to the bottom edge of the last line Line spacing Function Dec Hex ASCII 1 8 inch line spacing 27 48 1B 30 ESC 0 7 72 inch line spacing 27 49 1B 31 ESC 1 Menu defined line spacing 27 50 1B 32 ESC 2 without ESC A n 1 6 inch line spacing 27 50 1B 32 ESC 2 AGM Select variable line 27 65 1B 41n ESC An spacing n 72 inch n 1 to 255 Select variable line 27 65 1B 41n ESC An spacing n 60 inch AGM n 1 to 255 Deactivate ESC A n 27 50 1B 32 ESC 2 line spacing 10 16 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Set variable line 2751n 1B33n ESC spacing n 216 inch n 1 to 255 Set variable line 2751n 1B33n ESC spacing n 180 inch AGM n 1 to 255 Set variable line 273756n 1B2538n ESC 8n spacing n 360 inch n 1 to 255 With the variable spacing commands you can define the line spac ings via the parameter n in multiples of 1 72 inch 1 216 inch or 1 360 inch These commands do not execute a line feed but only set the line spacing which is used by a following line feed command The command ESC A n for a variable line spacing of n 72 inch as signs the desired value to the lin
32. 12 15 17 1 20 proportional Letter Quality LQ Data Processing Quality UTL 87 260 104 312 130 390 149 223 174 260 35 x 18 points at LQ 10 cpi 29 x 18 points at LQ 12 cpi 18 x 18 points at LQ 15 17 1 cpi 15 x 18 points at LO 20 cpi 9 x 17 points at UTL 10 12 17 1 20 cpi 7 x 17 points at UTL 15 cpi narrow model wide model 80 136 96 163 120 204 137 233 160 272 4 5 inches per second 6 and 8 lines per inch variable n 60 n 72 n 180 216 n 360 inch Appendix A Technical Data Interfaces Option Emulations Buffer Fonts Typefaces Barcodes Graphic Resolution Vertical Horizontal Paper Feed Top paper feed Top paper feed Rear paper feed Bottom Paper Feed Bottom Paper Feed Centronics parallel RS 232C serial RS 422A serial RS 232C Current Loop combined serial IBM ProPrinter X24 XL24 DLL is not supported Epson LQ max 23 KByte receive buffer UTL Data processing quality LQ Courier Roman Swiss Swiss Bold Gothic Prestige Orator special font OCR B1 Code 39 UPC A UPC E EAN 8 8 JAN8 EAN 13 IAN13 JAN13 Interleaved 2 5 Code 128 ZIP Code Postnetzbarcode 180 360 points inch 60 80 90 120 180 240 360 points inch automatic single sheet insertion with Cut Sheet Feeder option with internal Push Tractor with Push Tractor option with Pull Tractor option Appendix Technical Data Paper Specification
33. 13 13 8 42 42 28 14 14 9 43 43 28 15 15 10 44 44 29 16 16 10 45 45 30 17 17 11 46 46 30 18 18 12 47 47 31 19 19 12 48 48 32 20 20 13 49 49 32 21 21 14 50 50 33 22 22 14 51 51 34 23 23 15 52 52 34 24 24 16 53 53 35 25 25 16 54 54 36 26 26 17 55 55 36 27 27 18 56 56 37 28 28 18 57 57 38 29 29 19 58 58 38 30 30 20 59 59 39 31 31 20 60 60 40 32 32 21 61 61 40 33 33 22 62 62 41 34 34 22 63 63 42 35 35 23 64 64 42 10 30 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions The point size is defined with the parameters Lp and Hp Np Lp Hp 256 Point size Np 0 5 size Point size rounded of Np points size of Np 0 1 0 1 lt lt 17 8 16 18 lt Np lt 19 92 18 Np 20 10 20 Np 21 10 5 21 22 lt Np 23 11 22 24 lt Np lt 25 12 24 26 lt lt 125 13 62 26 124 all even digits 126 lt Np 127 63 126 128 x Np 32767 64 128 1 no change If the point size assignment of a preceding font scal ing command is still valid this point size is used If the point assignment is deleted i e no point size is selected the font is printed in the currently valid font size and current pitch cpi 2 The size of a font scaled to 9 points has the same appearance as that to a scaled font to 8 points The following table shows the reference of a selected character space Pn to a bitmapped font used by the printer if it is not scala ble 10 31 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions point 8 9
34. 30 GND 19 HP 24541B Printer Menu Settings SD A 9 SSD 3 lt Serial I F Option Protocol Ready Busy SD B 10 SSD 21 Busy Line DTR CB CTS 5 CS ind DSRSignal Invalid CC DSR 6 18 505 22 RD 6 pe RD 24 RS 7 RS 25 1 CS Li ce m v DM _ DM D V TR 12 In this circuit connection of a HP 24541B interface board with RS 422A Interface of the printer the ports SD A Pin 9 and SD B Pin 10 are connected to the ports RD Pin 6 and RD Pin 24 of the printer inter face These are the two lines for the transmission of the print data The two lines for the Ready Busy Signal are created by connecting ports CB CTS Pin 5 and RD B Pin 18 to the ports Pin 12 and TR Pin 30 of the printer interface Additionally a connection to CC DSR Pin 6 is established on the host side from CB CTS Pin 5 Looking at the two Ready Busy lines please note the following al though the port RD B Pin 18 on the host side is specific for the RS 422A interface the second line is connected to the ports CB CTS Pin 5 and CC DSR Pin 6 of the RS 232C interface This ensures the correct transmission of data with many applications but it cannot be guaranteed for all applications When printer and software status signals X ON and X OFF are evaluated by an application while this circuit example is used the correct data transmission with this type of interface board on the host side is not poss
35. 5 Close the printer cover and switch the printer ON LINE z again by means of the SEL cassette down over print head button Cleaning To ensure constant problem free printing clean the printer every six months or after 300 hours of operation A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down Before carrying out any cleaning remove all accessories from the printer such as the cut sheet feeder or tractor feed Clean the area around the axle of the print head carriage and the platen with a clean dry cloth Chapter 6 Consumables and cleaning Remove paper dust only with a soft brush such as a paint brush Do not grease or oil any parts within the printer this can cause damage Do not use any solvents or aggressive cleaning agents on the case or in the machine this can cause damage 6 4 Chapter 7 Accessories Chapter 7 Accessories The accessories described in this chapter extend the range of func tions provided by your printer For your safety and to avoid dam age to the machine switch the printer off before installing accessories remove the plug from the power supply Make sure you also read the safety information at the beginning of this manu
36. Bear this in mind when choosing the location for the printer Setting up the printer XV Power supply Cable wiring Ensure yourself that the ratings of the power supply match the ratings shown on the back of the printer If in doubt ask your supplier that the printer is connected to an earthed mains socket with the cable supplied when using an extension cable or multiple socket that you do not exceed the maximum electrical load for this all reasonable precautions have been taken to prevent damage to the power cable Do not place objects on the cable and make sure it is routed so that nobody walks on it or trips over it that a damaged cable is replaced immediately before cleaning the printer or the case that the power cable is removed from the power supply Use only a clean cloth for cleaning Do not use liquids or aerosol cleaners you have removed the plug from the mains outlet to ensure complete isolation from the mains supply The mains outlet you are using must be located close to the printer and be easily accessible The three wires of the power cable are colour coded The earth wire is yellow green the neutral wire is blue and the live current is on the brown wire Servicing maintenance Any servicing work on the machine that goes beyond the mainte nance described in the manual should be carried out by an author ised supplier We are not liable for damage arising due to unauthor
37. EAN 13 40 49 70 84 105 119 140 UPC A E char code ODD EANS EAN 13 41 49 70 84 105 119 140 UPC A E char code EVEN UPC A EANS8 15 18 27 31 42 48 57 EAN 13 start stop code UPC A EANS8 33 38 53 63 78 88 103 EAN 13 centre bar UPC E 15 18 27 31 42 48 57 start code UPC E 36 42 60 72 90 102 120 stop code Code 128 64 77 110 132 165 187 220 char code start code Code 128 71 88 127 153 192 218 257 stop code unit 1 360 inch Table of Module Widths A module is the narrowest element of a bar code With EAN UPC elements of a code character are and Code 128 the wide elements may be up to four times as wide as one module The table shows how wide the widths of the bar code Table 2 n Ratio Single Module Dual Module Triple Module Quadruple Module 1 1 3 9 13 19 9 14 19 24 2 1 5 4 11 18 25 10 17 24 31 3 2 7 17 27 37 13 23 33 43 Appendix Bar codes n Ratio Single Module Dual Module Triple Module Quadruple Module 4 2 5 9 21 33 45 15 27 39 51 5 3 12 27 42 57 18 33 48 63 6 3 5 14 31 48 65 20 37 54 71 7 4 17 37 57 77 23 43 63 83 unit 1 360 inch Code 39 Interleaved 2 5 width of black element n defines the width of the black element bar Together with n the total width of the black element can be taken from table 3 Table 3 Type n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ratio 1 5 2 25 3 35 4 schmales Element 3 4 7 9 12 14 17 n l 9 11 17 21 27 31 37 2 11 14 22 27 32 39 47 n 3 14 18 27 33 42 48 57 n 4
38. If the printer is switched off and on the standard tabs are available again If no other tab is set up to the end of line the tab jump command is ignored The command ESC R cancels any tab stops you have set and returns to the printer s defaults This means that horizontal tab stops will occur every eight columns and that there will be no vertical stops A VT command will just produce a single line feed The maximum permissible values for tab positions can be seen from the following table 10 10 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Max tabulator position Pitch Narrow printer Wide printer 10 cpi 79 135 12 cpi 95 162 15 cpi 119 203 17 1 cpi 136 232 20 cpi 159 255 Function Dec Hex ASCII Skip to next vertical 11 OB VT tab Set vertical tabs 27 66 1B 42 ESC n n 0 n n 00 n n NUL k 1to16 n 1 to 255 No vertical tabs are set when switching on the printer Up to 16 vertical tabulator positions can be set the positions being defined as a line number They must be entered in ascending order and end with a NUL character The parameter n indicates the line number of the first tab n to n accordingly the line numbers of the other tabs to be set Up to 64 vertical tabs can be defined n n ESC NUL deletes all vertical tabs If the command VT is entered without any tab positions being defined a line feed is executed The actual position of a tab mark depends on the actual line spacing when loading the ve
39. Lb Hb Lb Hb Lb Hb Function Dez Hex ASCII Select font by means of 27 88 1B 58 ESC X character pitch and Pn Lp Hp PnLpHp Pn Lp Hp point size Function Dez Hex ASCII Print characters from 27 40 94 1B 28 5E ESC A the fully printable Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn character set Daten Daten Daten Assign new code page 2740116 1B 2874 ESC t Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Pn Pn Pn Pn Pn Pn Pn Function Dez Hex ASCII Initialize raster graphics 27 4071 1B 28 47 ESC G LnHnPn LnHnPn Ln Hn Pn Raster graphics 27 46 1B 2E ESC Pc Ph Pc Pv Ph Pc Pv Ph Pm Ln Hn PmlnHn Pm Ln Hn Daten Daten Daten Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets This chapter contains the character sets available in Epson emulati on You can choose between three Epson character sets and nu merous national character sets The code page command allows you to select character sets that re place some less frequently used characters with symbols used in a variety of European languages Character Set Select Epson Character sets Normal character set ESC t NUL ESC 7 Graphics character set ESC t SOH ESC 7 Normal character set expansion ESC t SOH ESC 6 n Code Page Select National Character sets 0 ASCII ESC R NUL 1 French ESC R SOH 2 German ESC R STX 3 British ESC R ETX 4 Danish I ESC R EOT 5 Swedish I ESC ENQ 6 Italian ESC R ACK 7 Spanish I ESC R BEL 8 Japanese ESC R BS 9 Norwegian ESC R HT 10 Danish ESC R LF 11 S
40. Pitch Double width Condensed 10 cpi 5 cpi 17 1 cpi 12 cpi 6 cpi 20 cpi 15 cpi 7 5 cpi not available 17 1 cpi 8 5 cpi not available 20 cpi 10 cpi not available If proportional spacing is activated the use of double width prin ting gives double width proportional printing As this does not have a fixed pitch it is not shown in the table For certain applications the maximum number of characters in a line has to be indicated This depends on the pitch selected The following table shows the maximum number of characters per line Characters per line Pitch Narrow printer Wide printer 5 cpi 40 68 6 cpi 48 81 7 5 cpi 60 102 8 5 cpi 68 116 10 cpi 80 136 12 cpi 96 163 15 cpi 120 204 17 1 cpi 137 233 20 cpi 160 272 Function Dec Hex ASCII Start double height 27 11949 1B7731 ESC 1 27 31 49 1B 1F 31 ESC US 1 Stop double height 27 11948 1B7730 ESC 0 or 27 31 48 1B 1F 30 ESC US 0 With this command you can extend characters to double their nor mal height Note that you must reset the line spacing according to the new character height 14 4 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Start proportional spacing 27 11249 1 70 31 ESC p 1 Stop proportional spacing 2711248 1870 30 ESC p 0 With proportional spacing the spacing between the individual letters varies according to the respective character width With a fixed pitch all characters are created within a matrix of the same width
41. REAR position Chapter 3 Paper handling 2 Press downwards on the back of the paper support This will release it from its catch Remove it from the printer and place it to one side A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted 3 Release the catch lever of the left sprocket drive adjust this to the required position and fasten the sprocket drive again Chapter 3 Paper handling 4 Open the top part of the cov er 5 Place the continuous paper onto the first sprocket pins and close the cover again 6 Adjust the right sprocket drive to suit the width of paper as de scribed above Open the cover of the right sprocket drive place the continuous paper onto the first sprocket pins and close the cover 7 Replace the paper support cm and switch the printer on gy The print head will move to the left end of the platen the active lamps of the operator panel will light ALARM lamp that lights in this case indicates that there is no paper at the printing position 8 Press the FF LOAD button the paper is now transported to the initial printing position Chapter 3 Paper handling 9 Set the top of form if necessary with the Top Of Form function This is described later in the manual If the tractor feed is installed you can al
42. The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down 1 Switch the printer off and open the printer cover 2 Remove the ribbed paper separator by first pulling it forwards and then removing from its retainer see also Chapter 1 7 13 Chapter 7 Accessories Remove the paper support by pressing it downwards at the back This will release it from its catch see also Chapter 1 Fit the tractor feed onto the printer When doing this fit the slots at each end of the tractor onto the pins of the holder on the printer arrow Tilt the tractor feed for wards Pull the hooks on the outside of both ends of the tractor until you can hear it click into place on the platen at both ends Replace the printer cover with the acoustic cover sup plied with the tractor feed and close it Refit the paper support see Chapter 1 Switch the printer on 7 14 Chapter 7 Accessories gt Note Do not use the Park function in conjunction with the tractor feed otherwise the continuous paper will run completely out of the tractor guide With the tractor feed fitted you can feed continuous paper from below the printer and print on it Before doing this place the printer on a printer table provided with a feed slot The stack of continuous paper is placed under the table 1 Switch the prin
43. The stock of paper may be used up or the paper release lever is not set to the type of paper presently being used continuous paper or cut sheets Once you have remedied the reason for the fault turn the printer off and then on again in order to extinguish the ALARM lamp the ALARM lamp is blinking There is an internal fault Contact your supplier the MENU lamp is blinking The temperature sensor in the print head has detected that the tem perature is too high The printer automatically reduces its through put to allow the print head to cool down Printing then continues at normal speed with no loss of data Further information on ALARM messages is to be found at the end of the chapter Chapter 8 Troubleshooting nothing is being printed although the computer is sending data The printer may be switched OFF LINE If the SEL lamp is not lit press the SEL button Check that the interface cable is correctly con nected to your printer and computer paper jam occurs Paper jams rarely occur even if continuous paper and cut sheets are being alternately processed Therefore make sure the following points in particular are properly dealt with before printing Continuous paper was not properly inserted in the transport sprockets of the pull or bottom tractor feed You may have used unsuitable paper Refer to the notes on paper in Chapter 3 If you are still experiencing paper jams proceed as follo
44. interface driver and re ceive loop functions on the serial interface are now tested On completion of this test all characters are printed in a test pattern The result is printed as follows The message CORESIDENT SERIAL I F F W xx xx 4064 1578 LOOP TEST will be printed where xx xx is replaced by the current ROM version The printer checks the buffer and prints RAM GOOD if no error occurred or RAM BAD if an error occurred during the memory test The signal logic is also tested The message CURRENT LOOP I F GOOD is printed if no error was detected If an error occurred the message CURRENT LOOP I F BAD is printed Contact your local dealer if the message CURRENT LOOP I F BAD is printed D 36 Appendix D Interface Data From the printer s send loop hexadecimal characters from 20H to 7FH are transmitted into the receive loop These characters are stored in the buffer and printed This process is repeated until the printer is turned off The printer returns to normal operation when you set the Diagnostic Test menu option to No To set the printer to menu mode while the Diagnostic Test option is set to Yes hold the menu key down while switching the printer on D 37 Appendix Paper formats and print areas Appendix E Paper formats and print areas Continuous Paper Continuous paper must be punched and folded to sheet length a You can use up to four layers
45. lt Epson 1B 5216 4 6 5 4 1 5 5 5 Elu eu M 1 F olJ 6 7 7 G w s w T i 8 Hx 11 4 oe 9 loli 9 1 ol J z j z Plea B lt H 5 el l lriv riris m idil m el 1 lt gt N A n 4 F 27 0 _ 7 ISO Latin 2 ID 1015 RE P p la 1 SENI ala IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 F7 00 2 2 B blr 5 Epson 1B 52 17 3 C S e ls 4 4 D T d K ly 5 s El ujel u ri le tla 6 amp 6 fly 1 7 7 G w gw 8 8 H X h x 2 9 1 Y iy 6 A sls E 1 B K k diee 5 Z z U fa p spe ug Y y E 5 s EMI E zz bi s a B 11 Appendix Code pages Serbo Croatic 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D ID 1 01 6 joj 0 2 2
46. print sensitive or duplicat ing paper with a weight between 34 and 41 g m2 can be used Multiple sets with carbon The weight must be between 38 and 45 g m The paper thickness must not exceed 0 36 mm A carbon paper must have a maximum thickness of 0 03 mm When using duplicating paper one original and up to 3 duplicates can be produced The paper thickness depends on the feeding direction of the paper The paper thickness must not exceed a total of 0 36 mm if the paper is fed from the reverse side of the printer If the paper is fed from the bottom side of the printer the thickness must not exceed 0 44 mm Labels for OCR readers are an exception Aperforation must withstand the fast transportation speed and must be easily separable The bridges of a perforation must be firmly joined and not be separated at any point Please note that a separated perforation tears easily Appendix Paper formats and print areas 195 e e b 6 35 e e e e 50 8 ry Ty i d 3to4mm EN d e e e e e e e e i id 2 ea e pes e e e e e e e oq e e e e e e e e D 577 Horizontal Perforation Within a range of 1 to 2 mm there must not be any hole at the top or lower edge of the paper Vertical Perforation If a vertical perforation is within the print area a
47. the platen knob pointing up wards The right support foot is to be fitted first Hook the corners of the sup port foot into the cutouts provided for this in the bot tom of the printer Press the foot carefully in the direction of the arrow to wards the bottom of the printer so that its edges line up with those of the printer Before fitting the left foot temporarily remove the plat en knob to avoid damaging it Set the printer on its right side in order to fit the left support foot in a similar way Cutouts 7 19 Chapter 7 Accessories 6 Once the two feet are fitted you need to fold them out to allow you to install the trac tor feed As a result the printer will tilt backwards Replace the platen knob Installing the tractor To install the tractor feed you feed need firstly to fold out the two support feet Then proceed as described below Mounting hooks Cutouts A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down 7 20 Chapter 7 Accessories Place the tractor feed with the cutouts at both ends onto the retaining pins on the bot tom of the printer arrow Gently push the tractor feed towards th
48. the upper needles of the next line lines per inch The vertical distance of the print lines is giv en in lines per inch Common values are 6 or Main Internal Storage Random Access Memory RAM In this write read memory random access memory the data received is stored and pre pared for line by line printout Depending on the type the printer memory can be en larged with additional modules and there fore relieve the computer The contents of the RAM are lost when the printer is switched off Matrix Printer The characters are made up of a matrix of single dots See dot matrix printer F 8 Appendix Index Glossary MByte 1024 bytes are one megabyte Memory See Main Internal Storage RAM Menu By means of the menu you may select most of the functions of your printer such as paper format and emulation The menu is selected via the operating screen Near Letter Quality NLQ This font is available for most 9 pin printers but it does not reach the print quality of letter quality OCR Optical Character Recognition The OCR code consists of exactly defined characters which can be read by every OCR device Off line In this state the printer no longer receives data and is on stand by In the off line mode you can modify the menu setting On line In this operating state data can be received processed and printed Parallel Interface Connection element to trans
49. 10 10 5 21 space Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Pn cpi cpi cpi cpi 1 8 prop prop prop prop dbl hight dbl width 5 21 8 comp 12 comp 12 comp 12 comp dbl hight 22 24 8 10 comp 10 comp 10 comp dbl hight 25 30 8 12 12 12 dbl hight 31 36 8 10 10 10 dbl hight 37 42 8 bold 10 bold 10 bold 10 dbl hight bold 43 48 8 dbl width 10 comp 10 comp 10 comp dbl width dbl width dbl width dbl hight 49 60 8 dbl width 12 dbl width 12 dbl width 12 dbl hight dbl width 61 127 8 dbl width 10 dbl width 10 dbl width 10 dbl hight dbl width Following table shows the relation between selected font and the font used by the printer selected font used by printer font 8 9 10 10 5 11 20 21 22 64 Courier Courier Courier Courier Courier Courier Roman Roman Roman Roman Roman Roman 1 Courier i j T Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss ourler 15 use every ime 1 1 if a font is selected that is not Prestige Roman Prestige Courier Prestige Courier scalable With the pitches of Orator Swiss Orator Courier Orator Courier 8 2 10 d the Swiss Bold Swiss Swiss Bold Courier Swiss Bold Courier Jonte are printed us biimap Gothic Swiss Gothic Courier Gothic Courier fonts 10 32 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Special cases e Point size is set to Np 42 21 points Proportional or fixed point size Pn gt 33
50. 180 inch Rounding errors are compensa ted for as far as possible Function Dec Hex ASCII Form feed 12 0C FF If a form feed command is sent the printer prints all data in the line buffer and sets the current print position at the start of the next page You can also advance a page to the start of the next page by pressing the FF Load key on the control panel 14 18 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Control of the Cut Sheet Feeder Function Dec Hex ASCII Insert single sheet 272573 1B 19 49 ESC EM I Eject single sheet 27 25 82 1B 19 52 ESC EM R The feed command feeds a sheet of paper from the Cut Sheet Feeder CSF to the set Top of Form Any sheet of paper already in the printer is ejected before a new one is fed in The eject command causes data in the printer buffer to be printed and the sheet to be ejected If the page end or the area to be skipped at the page end is reached the sheet is ejected and a new sheet auto matically fed and advanced to the print position Any defined Top of Form position however is disregarded Therefore when a Cut Sheet Feeder is installed the page change in the case of multipage documents must be performed with the form feed command Function Dec Hex ASCII Select bin 1 27 25 49 1B 19 31 ESC EM 1 Select bin 2 27 25 50 1B 19 32 ESC EM 2 With the two bin selection commands you can define from which bin paper is to be fed when using a dual bin Cut Sheet Feeder Whe
51. 2 M I mj J f Y i 2 gt IN A n 5 3 Appendix Code pages Multilingual ID 850 c 0 0 0 P L 3 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 5200 Fi tsh o cai l rZ Lp al 1 52 1 ae Els FS NE EPIO ES 3 85 4 11 5 1 4 1 91 5 15 5 6 2 amp 6 7 7 G W g 8 miti 8 H h i P 9 oh il lolil vylilylsl o 9 alr ty 6 Bigdiel lt 5 1 1 E my 2 Jala F alv i i lol o gt East Europe Latin 2 d ID 852 0 gt amp 1 4 11 2 1 5 54 05 00 00 00 03 54 00 2 2 BR b amp T Epson 18 52 2E 3 4 11 25 p T 1 5 s Q 5 Elu l el ul u a 6 6 F V If v T ZIA A e 7 G Wlg w ce S z
52. 2 3 points 14 64 character pitch in relation to point size as follows Character pitch 360 INT Point size 2 3 standard width 10 5 0 5 cpi Selected Normal Selected Normal pointsize font Subscript pointsize font Subscript 8 8 8 36 36 24 9 9 8 37 37 24 10 10 8 38 38 25 10 5 10 5 10 5 2 3 39 39 26 11 11 8 40 40 26 12 12 8 41 41 27 13 13 8 42 42 28 14 14 9 43 43 28 15 15 10 44 44 29 16 16 10 45 45 30 17 17 11 46 46 30 18 18 12 47 47 31 19 19 12 48 48 32 20 20 13 49 49 32 21 21 14 50 50 33 22 22 14 51 51 34 23 23 15 52 52 34 24 24 16 53 53 35 25 25 16 54 54 36 26 26 17 55 55 36 27 27 18 56 56 37 28 28 18 57 57 38 29 29 19 58 58 38 30 30 20 59 59 39 31 31 20 60 60 40 32 32 21 61 61 40 33 33 22 62 62 41 34 34 22 63 63 42 35 35 23 64 64 42 14 36 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions The point size is determined by means of the parameters Lp and Hp Np Lp Hp 256 point size Np 0 5 Refer to the following table for details Size specified Point size Rounded up down of Np dots size of Np 0 1 0 1 lt lt 17 8 16 18 lt Np lt 19 9 18 Np 20 10 20 Np 21 10 5 21 22 lt Np 23 11 22 24 lt Np lt 25 12 24 26 lt lt 125 13 62 26 124 all even digits 126 lt Np lt 127 63 126 128 lt Np lt 32767 64 128 1 No change if the point size assignment of a previous font scaling command is still valid this point size is used
53. 38 33 84 DC4 14 t 74 84 38 34 85 NAK 15 u 75 85 38 35 86 SYN 16 v 76 86 38 36 87 ETB 17 w 77 87 38 37 88 18 78 88 38 38 89 19 79 89 38 39 90 SUB 1A 7 7A 90 39 30 91 ESC 1B 7B 91 39 31 Appendix Bar codes Ref Code A Code B Code C Value ASCII Hex ASCII Hex Digit Hex 92 FS 1 7 92 39 32 93 GS 1D 7D 93 39 33 94 RS 1E 7E 94 39 34 95 US 1F DEL 7 95 39 35 96 FNC3 60 3 19 96 39 36 97 FNC 2 61 2 1 97 39 37 98 SHIFT 62 SHIFT 1B 98 39 38 99 Code C 63 CodeC 1C 99 39 39 100 Code B 64 4 1D CodeB 3A 101 FNC 4 65 Code A Code A 102 FNC 1 66 1 1 3C 103 START Code ESC DLE A P 40 n n ESC DLE B P A Data 104 START Code B ESC DLE A P 40 n n ESC DLE B P B Data 105 START Code C ESC DLE A P 4 0 n n ESC DLE B P C Data STOP Code 11 After printing the bar code the print head is positioned at the end of the first printed line 12 If the bar code extends beyond the right margin the command will be ignored and the bar code will not be printed A CR LF Carriage Return Line Feed is performed and the bar code is printed in the next line if the bar code is positioned beyond the right margin before the actual print command 13 The following bar code types add a start bar a center bar and a stop bar EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E 14 Notes for the
54. 3F 31 33 31 32 40 40 32 33 32 33 41 41 33 33 33 34 42 42 34 33 34 35 C 43 C 43 35 33 35 36 D 44 D 44 36 33 36 37 45 45 37 33 37 38 46 46 38 33 38 39 G 47 G 47 39 33 39 40 H 48 H 48 40 34 30 41 I 49 I 49 41 3431 42 J 4A J 4A 42 3432 43 K 4B K 4B 43 34 33 44 L 4C L 4C 44 3434 45 M 4D M 4D 45 34 35 46 4 4 46 34 36 47 O 4F 47 34 37 48 50 50 48 34 38 49 Q 51 Q 51 49 34 39 50 52 52 50 35 30 51 5 53 5 53 51 35 31 52 54 54 52 35 32 53 U 55 U 55 53 35 33 C 14 Appendix Bar codes Ref Code Code B Code C Value ASCII Hex ASCII Hex Digit Hex 54 56 56 54 35 34 55 w 57 w 57 55 35 35 56 X 58 X 58 56 35 36 57 Y 59 Y 59 57 35 37 58 Z 5A Z 5A 58 35 38 59 5 5 59 35 39 60 5 5 60 36 30 61 50 50 61 36 31 62 s 5E 5E 62 36 32 63 5F 5F 63 36 33 64 NUL 00 60 64 36 34 65 SOH 01 a 61 65 36 35 66 STX 02 b 62 66 36 36 67 03 63 67 36 37 68 04 64 68 36 38 69 05 65 69 36 39 70 06 f 66 70 37 30 71 BEL 07 g 67 71 37 31 72 BS 08 h 68 72 37 32 73 09 1 69 73 37 33 74 LF 0A j 6A 74 37 34 75 OB k 6B 75 37 35 76 FF 0C 1 6 76 37 36 77 CR 0 m 6D 77 37 37 78 SO OE n 6E 78 37 38 79 SI OF 6 79 37 39 80 DLE 10 70 80 37 30 81 DC1 11 q 71 81 38 31 82 DC2 12 r 72 82 38 32 83 DC3 13 s 73 83
55. 4 m 5 D gt 55 E plaA gt i ce O o H gt s Kamenicky MJK ID 895 loe 1 2 s 4 s e v s A B c p s F 0 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 7 00 Ese e ala Fels e EE lt e Epson 1B 52 37 5 ol el o glr viris 3 3 c s c lt 4 gt 5 s EIJU e u D N d3 t Flo J 6 amp 6 F V f v T E H ul 7 7 G W kit cl 8 lt 9 1 K lk tlf S R 1 M gt d e B 8 Appendix Code pages 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BI C D Greek 437 ID 1008 0 Q P 1 Lil IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 FO 00 z lelg zs gt Epson 1B 52 26 isi c s A lids 4 115 4 t f 5 5 2 5 2 4 Fl ec J 6 amp 6 F V dH F 7 e 7 G W g 1
56. 5B 40 ESC Line spacing 40 04 00 EOT NUL 00 00 00 NUL NUL n n n n n n When using double height characters are extended to double their normal height This function can be combined with double width and emphasized into a variety of print attributes When using dou ble height you should increase the line spacing accordingly Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions With this command in addition to the character height you can also define the character width and the line spacing The different com binations of these three functions result from the values for the var iables n and n n defines the character height and line spacing and n defines the character width n Result 0 Current line spacing current character height 1 Current line spacing normal character height 2 Current line spacing double character height 16 Single line spacing current character height 17 Single line spacing normal character height 18 Single line spacing double character height 32 Double line spacing current character height 33 Double line spacing normal character height 34 Double line spacing double character height n Result 0 Current character width 1 Standard character width 2 Double character width Example If you want to print double height characters with double line spac ing without changing the character width you must enter the fol lowing BASIC instruction LPRINT 27 4
57. 64 1 64 32 32 0 0 3 16 16 1 16 Byte 3 87 8 8x0 0 4 4 1 4 2 2 1 2 1 e 1x12 1 dotset dot not set 11 3 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Alternative Graphics Mode IBM AGM Graphic modes In the field Width the maximum number of dot columns for the narrow wide printer model is given Graphics of high resolution Function Dec Hex ASCII High resolution graphics 2791103 185867 ESC g n n m n n m n n m The command shown above defines the graphic resolution and the mode 24 pin or quasi 8 pin graphics The values n n and m are explained in the text below This mode can be activated in the menu It contains partial compati bility to the Epson series but is principally restricted to graphics and line feed commands The commands available in AGM or com mands with another meaning are identified accordingly Function Dec Hex ASCII High resolution graphics 27 42 m 1B2Am only AGM n n n n n n See the table below for the value m for the two high resolution Un der IBM you will see the value for the command ESC n gives the value for m should you use the command ESC m in Alternative Graphics Mode Density Mode Resolution Width IBM AGM pins dpi Single Density 8 60 480 816 0 0 Double Density 8 120 960 1632 1 1 High Speed Double Density 8 120 960 1632 2 2 Quadruple Densi
58. Appendix Paper formats and print areas When using a cut sheet feeder CSF the cut sheet formats are differ ent The paper width is between 182 216 mm small printer and between 182 and 364 mm large printer The paper length b is between 182 and 356 mm small printer and between 182 and 364 mm large printer You can use paper weights between 45 and 90 g m When using cut sheets via the cut sheet feeder CSF the paper weight must not be less than 60 g m and must not exceed 90 g m Labels on single sheets The paper width is between 88 9 216 mm small printer and between 88 9 and 363 mm large printer The paper length b is between 76 and 420 mm The non printable left margin is between 6 35 and 28 6 mm For paper with a width of 304 8 mm the size must be between 19 05 and 28 6 mm Weight 88 9 to 216 mm 88 9 to 363 mm b 76 to 420 mm printable length d printable width e min 6 35 mm f min 4 35 mm g 6 35 to 28 6 mm h min 6 35 mm Format Appendix Paper formats and print areas Weight Further information 6 35 b min 2 54 min 2 mm d min 6 35 mm e 12 7 mm f 2 min 6 35 mm label corners must be rounded off The support paper for labels can be processed with a weight of 33 to 41 g m The overall thickness of 0 28 mm however must not be ex
59. CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHRS 0 CHR 34 CHRS 0 The parameters n and n to be taken from the table 10 9 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Horizontal tabulators Tabulators Function Dec Hex ASCII Skip to next horizontal 9 09 HT tab Set horizontal tabs 27 68 1B 44 ESC Dn n 00 n 00 n NUL n 1to 255 k 1 to 28 Clear horizontal tabs 27 68 0 1B 44 00 ESC D NUL When the printer is switched on tabulators are set automatically every eight columns starting with the ninth column If a tabulator character HT is transmitted the print head moves to the next set tab position before printing the following character The set tabulator position relates to the extreme left print column and not the set left margin absolute reference The actual position of a tab depends on the actual pitch at the time when loading the horizontal tab When the pitch is changed the tab position moves relative position It is mandatory to enter the tab positions in as cending order The parameter n indicates the column position of the first tab n to n accordingly the column positions of the other tabs to be set Up to 28 n n tabs can be defined The position of a horizontal tab relates absolutely to the character column zero i e to the physical left margin The command sequence must be ended with a NUL character The command ESC D NUL clears all horizontal tabs including the standard tabs
60. Chapter 7 Accessories Feeding cut sheets and continuous paper Printing area Selecting the paper tray Removing the cut sheet feeder from the printer If you are using single part continuous paper you can leave the cut sheet feeder on the printer and alternately feed and process contin uous paper and cut sheets from the sheet feeder To do this trans port the continuous paper into the PARK position as described in Chapter 3 It is not possible to process multi part forms with the cut sheet feeder installed Use the tractor feed to process multi part forms accessory Even though the cut sheet feeder permits printing of cut sheets from the top of the page it is advisable to leave a top margin of 1 3 inch 0 85 cm and a bottom margin of 1 inch 2 54 cm as the print quality cannot be guaranteed in this area and there are likely to be a greater number of paper jams The bottom limit of printing is defined by the menu item Bottom Margin If Bottom Margin is set to Valid a bottom margin of 1 2 inch 13 mm is preset If on the other hand this menu item is set to Invalid the bottom margin depends on the page length set in the menu The smallest possible bottom margin can be 0 5 mm In this case make sure the page length is correctly set If you have installed a cut sheet feeder with two paper trays you can feed paper from either the front or rear tray as required In many application programs the choice of tray can be
61. Declaration of Conformity OKI UK Ltd 3 Castlecary road Wardpark North Cumbernauld UK G68 ODA herewith declare that the equipment described below meets the requirements of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC Description of equipment 24 Pin Dot Matrix Printer Model Number GE7200B Model Name ML 3390 Applied standards 50082 1 1992 50081 1 1992 IEC801 2 1984 55022 Class B IEC801 3 1984 IEC801 4 1988 61000 3 2 1995 EN60950 Name of Authorised Signatory Mr Gordon L Woolley Director General Manager 2 Date 20 Declaration of Conformity CE Declaration of Conformity OKI UK Ltd 3 Castlecary road Wardpark North Cumbernauld UK G68 ODA erewith declare that the equipment described below meets the requirements of the directive 89 336 EEC Description of equipment 24 Pin Dot Matrix Printer Model Number GE7200B Model Name ML 3390 Applied standards EN50082 1 1992 50081 1 1992 IEC801 2 1984 IEC801 3 1984 IEC801 4 1988 EN55022 Class B EN61000 3 2 1995 EN60950 Name of Authorised Signatory Mr Gordon L Woolley Position of the Signatory Director General Manager 2 Signature A Date Ac UE OKI Europe Ltd Central House Balfour Road Hounslow Middlesex TW3 1HY United Kingdom 44 0 181 219 2190 44 0 181 219 2199 Systems Deutschland GmbH Hansaallee 187 4054
62. ESC DLE F point size Pn Pn0 Pn Pn0 Pn Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp 12 6 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Graphics High resolution graphics 2791103 1B5B67 ESC g n n m n n m n n m High resolution graphics 2742 1B2Am only AGM n n n n n n Aspect ratio 27110m 1B6Em ESC nm Activate single density 27 75 1B 4B ESC graphics n n n n n n Activate double density 2776 1B 4 ESC L graphics and half n n n n n n print speed Activate double density 27 89 1B 59 ESC Y graphics n n n n n n Activate quadruple 27 90 1B5A ESC 2 density graphics n n n n n n 12 7 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets This chapter contains the character sets available in IBM emulation You can choose between two IBM character sets and numerous na tional character sets The code page command allows you to select character sets that re place some less frequently used characters with symbols used in a variety of European languages Character Set Select IBM Character Sets Select IBM Character Set I ESC 7 Select IBM Character Set II ESC 6 Print 1 character in All Chracter Set ESC n Select All Chracter Set ESC n n Character Set Select National Character Sets ASCII ESC ASCII 0 ESC A British ESC German ESC C French ESC D Swedish I ESC E Danisch ESC F Norwegian ESC G Dutch ESC H Italian ESC I French Canadi
63. F V 4 PON 7 7 G w n P 8 O tlc Hx 9 v 2 A gt J Z x lt gt 2 91 el Ex 5 D _ M Ag n E gt N n7 1034 68 011123415 8 9 D E F 0 0 5 a 11 9 4 1 a 2 9 2 B R e JAJN ala w 3 5 4 4 n Ol o 5 6 amp 6 F V 6 7 7 G W 8 E 8 H x o0 e lC lu 9 6 gt J Z R r Z B lt K lt gt Gp ne lt I LIA D gt 1 2 gt E e L B 18 Appendix Code pages 011121345 8 9 B CI ID E F 014 P 0 P 1 1 8 4 2 2 B rT T 31 5 lt 4 q no p A gt 5 5 E U E x x N o J 6 amp 6 F V x u 7 e 7 G W 3 4 8 X H m 9 t 9 I Y J Z S lt ol iF 5 9 M b D gt
64. For further information about the configuration of this adapter see IBM Personal Computer Techni cal Reference Manual P N 6936844 D 29 Appendix D Interface Data Diagram 8 Diagram 9 Connection 4 wire Power source receive loop Host Power source send loop Host Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper SP4 A 2 8 b a 9 1 AB EIE D 10 S 5 1 oo Ready Busy XON XOFF SP1 obo Centronics Blocked Duplex 5 aA B S lt En B 19 3 SP4 lt 5 5 GND7 Connection 4 wire 3 wire Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop Printer Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper SP4 A B D 9 EE MS SP1 cios Ready XON XOFF K SP1 ks Centronics Blocked Duplex a fed B B 18 SP4 lt 19 999 SP5 7 oy D 30 Appendix D Interface Data Connection 4 wire Power source receive loop Host Power source send loop Printer Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper D 9 D 10 e 18 19 GND 7 Connection 4 wire Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop Host Host Printer gate Ready XON XOFF AB Centronics Blocked Duplex AB
65. H printing Start underline 274549 1B2D31 ESC 1 Stop underline 27 45 48 182030 5 0 Start overscoring 27 95 49 1B 5F 31 ESC 1 Stop overscoring 27 95 48 1B 5F 30 ESC _ 0 Start superscript 27 83 48 1B 53 30 ESC 50 Start subscript 27 83 49 1B 53 31 ESC 51 Stop super subscript 27 84 1B 54 ESC T Start italic 27 37 71 1B 25 47 ESC G Stop italic 25 37 72 1B 25 48 ESC H Function Dez Hex ASCII Print quality character 27 73n 1B49n ESCIn pitch and typeface Character size 27 91 64 1B 5B 40 ESC Line spacing 40 04 00 EOT NUL 00 00 00 NUL NUL n n n n n n 12 2 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Tabulators Horizontal tab position 9 09 HT Set horizontal tab 27 68 1B 44 ESC D n n 00 n n 00 n n NUL Clear horizontal tab 27 68 0 1B 44 00 ESC D NUL Vertikal tab position 11 OB VT Set vertical tab 27 66 1B 42 ESC B n n 0 n n 00 n n NUL Reset horizontal 27 82 1B 52 ESC R vertical tabs to default Function Dez Hex ASCII Positioning Relative horiz dot 27 100 1B 64 ESC d position to the right nn nn n n Relative horiz dot 27 101 1B 65 ESC position to the left n n n n n n Start indication 271051 1B 69 01 ESCiSOH print position Stop indication 27 105 0 1 69 00 ESC i NUL print position Function Dez Hex ASCII Page formatting Page length in lines 27 67 1 43 ESC Page length in inches 27 670 1B 43 00 ESC C NUL n n n Set current print head 27 52 1B 34 ESC 4 positi
66. HERES Epson 1B 52 42 RIEN elr 3 3 CS c sr y r lil l r 4 4 1 5 5 E U elu E X 4 6 amp I 7 7 G W g s T i s u i 8 8 H X h x A MW u lh m I 9 9 i aw sl J Z B K k bM a H u C lt L IfI Hilli N D M m H 3 E gt IN A n lt o di 1 7 0 1 0 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 p h eE ID 1029 1 lila Alal N n IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 05 00 2 1 52 43 3 5 5 0 alo 4 4 pn Td t 5 5 E U e u 1 6 41 5 6 amp 6 F V f v K k 2 O 2 6 7 7 G W e w 8 8 H X h x L lj cC o os 9 l9 I Y ily p al ul lu A J Z j z 5 E B k xa d Y y E gt N 1 gt 1 gt QE 1170 N a i i x B 16 Appendix Code pages Hebrew ID 1030 0 2 L au IBM 1 58 54 05 00 00 00 0
67. Handshake A protocol secures the data transmission Depending on the interface the printer out puts a message by control characters or sepa rate signal lines that the receiving memory is full and is able to ensure a correct data recep tion and transmission Random Access Memory RAM See Main Internal Storage Reset Systems computer printer are returned to their initial state Resident A term used in data processing with respect to contents of the RAM Resolution The resolution of the print depends on the pin diameter of the print head The resoluti on is mostly measured in dots per inch dpi For graphics the resolution varies from 72 dpi 9 pin printer up to 300 dpi 24 pin prin ter ROM Read Only Memory In this read only memory which cannot be changed the firmware the control program of the printer is stored emulation and con trol of the printing mechanism RS 232C Interface A serial interface according to an American standard It corresponds to the international ITU standard V 24 in conjunction with V 28 and German standard DIN 66020 Serial Interface A connection for data transmission succes sively bit by bit between printer and com puter Serial interfaces are suited for longer distances See also RS 232C Set Character Spacing Similar to typewriter fonts every character occupies the same space regardless of its ac tual width See also proportional fonts The character spaci
68. If lines are printed on top of each other Yes is the correct value Auto CR If you wish the printer to perform a carriage return auto matically each time it receives the line feed command select Yes at this position CSF Bin Select If you are using a cut sheet feeder with two bins you can use this menu item to select one of these two bins as the standard bin and set different positions for the initial print line top of form for both bins After quitting the menu you can change the top of form position for the bin selected in the menu SI Select Pitch 10 cpi You can define here whether the command SI in IBM emulation selects a character pitch of 17 1 cpi or 20 cpi when 10 cpi is used SI Select Pitch 12 cpi You can define here whether the command SI in IBM emulation selects a character pitch of 20 cpi or retains 12 cpi Time Out Print If this function is activated and the printer receives no data for 150 ms the data in the printer buffer is printed out 4 12 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Auto Select If a sheet of paper has been fed automatically from the paper support when the setting is No the printer stays in the OFF LINE status If Yes is selected the printer switches to ON LINE when a sheet of paper is fed and the SEL lamp lights Graphics Speed By means of this menu item the printing speed for graphics of a lower resolution can be increased by selecting High Centering Position This menu item
69. National Character Sets Code Pages Technical Data Code Pages Overview Conversion table Code pages Bar Codes Bar code types Positioning Selection of type and size of Bar code Printing of a 24 pin Bar code Examples Zip Code Setting the print position Interface Data Parallel Interfacing Centronics Pin Description Signal levels Timing Interface test RS 232C Serial Interface Pin Description Signal levels Interface wiring Interface test RS 422A Serial Interface Pin Description Signal levels Menu options of serial interfaces Transmission protocols Connections of the RS 422A Interface Diagrams Interface test XIII 0 22 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 26 0 29 2 30 0 37 1 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 Appendix Appendix Coresident RS 232C Current Loop Interface Technical Data Pin description Interface selection Transmission protocols Connections of the Current Loop Interface Diagrams Interface test Paper formats and print areas Continuous paper Format Weight Thickness Perforation Further information Cut sheet paper Format Weight Labels on single sheet Format Weight Further information Labels on continuous paper Format Weight Further information Index Glossary Trademarks Appendix H Short reference XIV Safety advice Your printer has been developed with the utmost care to en
70. ON LINE while paper is placed into the manual feed slot it becomes the priority tray for a cut sheet In the event of a multi page print job the printer will merely take the first sheet from the manual feed slot All other sheets will be taken automatically from the current paper tray of the cut sheet feed er Changing over to the manual feed slot If the printer is OFF LINE while paper is placed into the manual feed slot it serves as the manual feed tray The sheet you have in serted is drawn in automatically after the time set in the Wait Time menu If the Auto Select menu item is set to No it will be necessary to press the SEL button after each automatic feed operation If the Auto Select menu item is set to Yes printing begins directly after the automatic feed operation For the subsequent pages of a print job the printer waits for a fur ther sheet of paper from the feed slot after the first sheet has been printed and ejected At the same time the ALARM lamp is lit and the SEL lamp is extinguished Single sheets have to be inserted in the manual feed slot right to the end of the print job Changing over to normal printing operation To change back to normal printing operation you merely need to switch the printer back to ON LINE mode once the print job has finished After this the printer will take the next sheet to be printed from the current tray of the cut sheet feeder Manual paper feed 7 9
71. Paper Feed Function Dez Hex ASCII Page length in lines 27 67 1B 43 ESC Page length in inches 276701 1B4300n ESCCNULn Activate Skip over 27 78 1B 4E n ESC Perforation Deactivate Skip over 27 79 1B 4F ESC O Perforation Set left margin 27 108 1B6Cn ESC In Set right margin 27 81n 1B51n ESC On Function Dez Hex ASCII 1 8 inch line spacing 27 48 1B 30 ESC 0 Set 1 6 inch line spacing 2750 1B 32 ESC 2 Set variable line 2765n 1B41n ESC An spacing n 60 inch Set variable line 2751n 1B 33 n ESC spacing n 180 inch Set variable line 2791n 1B 58 ESC spacing n 360 inch Set variable line 27 43 1B2Bn ESC n spacing n 360 inch Function Dez Hex ASCII Line feed 10 0A LF Variable line feed 27 74 1B4An ESCJn n 180 inch Variable line feed 27 93 1B 5D ESC Jn n 360 inch Reverse line feed 27 106n 1B6An ESC jn n 180 inch Form feed 12 0C FF 16 4 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Cut Sheet Feeder 3 control Insert single sheet 27 25 73 1B 19 49 ESC EM I Eject single sheet 27 25 82 1B 19 52 ESC EM R Select bin 1 27 25 49 1B 19 31 ESC EM 1 Select bin 2 27 25 50 1B 19 32 ESC EM 2 Function Dez Hex ASCII Character sets Activate extension of 27 54 1B 36 ESC 6 printable characters Deactivate extension 27 55 1B37 ESC7 Activate italic 27 1160 1B 74 00 ESC t NUL character set Activate character 27 1161 1B 74 01 ESC t SOH set
72. Pn must be set 3 For values of Pn lt 3 this command is ignored For values of Pn gt 3 Pn 3 data bytes are ignored which follow the parameter Hp e The parameter Pn defines the pitch and parameters Lp and Hp the point size of the font e Values from 0 to 255 are permitted for Pn the most significant bit however being disregarded e Forvalues2 Pn 4 this command is ignored e For values gt 4 the pitch of Pn 360 inch is assigned to the font e The value Pn 0 does not alter the current pitch and Pn 1 selects proportional spacing e The following relation between pitch and point size applies to proportional spacing Pitch 360 INT Point size standard width 10 5 0 5 cpi e Point size is the size entered with parameters Lp and Hp Stand ard width is the proportional width with a font size of 10 5 points The following relation applies to super subscript with proportional spacing 10 29 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Point size Character space 8 13 character space same as 8 points 10 5 character space same as 10 5 2 3 points 14 64 character space in relation to point size as following Pitch 360 Point size 2 3 standard width 10 5 0 5 cpi selected normal super selected normal super point size size subscript pointsize size subscript 8 8 8 36 36 24 9 9 8 37 37 24 10 10 8 38 38 25 10 5 10 5 10 5 2 3 39 39 26 11 11 8 40 40 26 12 12 8 41 41 27
73. Proportio nal spacing however gives wide characters such as w or M more space and narrow characters such as I or f less space The result is an attractive and more legible print image than with a fixed pitch Because of the different character widths proportional fonts do not have a fixed pitch Precise margin settings in the case of full justi fied text for example is only possible if the word processing pro gram supports proportional spacing Proportional spacing is only available in letter quality This function can also be activated via the Pitch menu item or via the control panel Proportional spacing is also available via multi function commands Function Dec Hex ASCII Set character spacing 2732n 1B20n ESCSPn Standard character spacing 27 320 1B 20 00 ESC SP NUL n 1 to 127 With this command you can define the spacing between characters by entering a specific number of dot columns Some word proces sing programs are able to specify the spacing between individual characters If this option is supported by your application program you can use this function Proportional spacing Character spacing 14 5 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Emphasized Enhanced Underline Score type Print attributes Function Dec Hex ASCII Start emphasized 27 69 1B 45 ESC E Stop emphasized 2770 1B 46 ESC With emphasized the dot patterns of the characters are printed ho rizontally
74. SSD Baud Rate 9 600 bps DSR Signal Valid DTR Signal Ready on Power up Busy Time 200 ms Chapter 5 Printer Control The serial interface settings in the computer are defined with the MODE command as follows MODE COM1 9600 n 8 1 p Please refer to the DOS manual for more information on the MODE command Notes and further information on the serial interface wiring pin assignment etc are to be found in the Interface Data appendix Troubleshooting Should your printer not print under DOS when using a serial con nection go through the following checklist 1 Check whether there is a technical fault on the serial interface RS 232C To do this perform the test described in Appendix D Check the settings of the items in the printer menu which relate to the serial interface These settings must agree with the settings in your system Make sure the serial interface is correctly set up under DOS Check the interface cable With the multitude of cables available it is often difficult to find a cable suitable for your particular re quirements The interface cable described in Appendix D can be used both for transmission protocol X ON X OFF and Ready Busy Busy Line DTR Chapter 6 Consumables and cleaning Chapter 6 Consumables and cleaning Changing the ribbon cassette If the contrast of the printed characters is deteriorating the ribbon needs to be changed To do this proceed as follo
75. Standard Functions Select font Function Dec Hex ASCII Select font Select font by means of 27 88 1B 58 ESC X character pitch and PnLpHp PnlpHp Pn Lp Hp point size Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lp 0 to 255 0 to 255 MSB ignored With his command a previously selected font can be scaled in li mited bounds when defining the character pitch and point size The character pitch is defined by means of the parameter Pn and by means of the parameters Lp and Hp the point size of the font For Pn all values of 0 to 255 are permissible the highest value bit however is not taken into account e With values 2 lt Pn lt 4 this command is ignored For values greater than 4 the character pitch Pn 360 inch is as signed to the font The value Pn 0 does not change the current character pitch and Pn 1 selects proportional character pitch Inthe case of proportional fonts the following relation between character pitch and point size applies Character pitch 360 INT point size standard width 10 5 0 5 cpi Point size the size specified by means of the parameters Lp and Hp proportional width for a font size of 10 5 point For superscripts subscripts the following relation applies for pro portional fonts 14 35 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Point size Character pitch 8 13 character pitch as with a size of 8 points 10 5 character pitch as with a size of 10 5
76. Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss Swiss Prestige Roman Prestige Courier Prestige Courier Orator Swiss Orator Courier Orator Courier Swiss Swiss Swiss Courier Swiss Courier Bold Bold Bold Gothic Swiss Gothic Courier Gothic Courier 14 38 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions 3 The font Courier is used as a replacement by the printer when a font is selected in a point size in which it is not scalable In the sizes 8 9 10 and 10 5 point the fonts are printed as bitmap fonts Special cases The point size is set to Np 42 21 point Proportional and fixed character pitch gt 34 Ifa font with the exception of Courier Roman or Swiss is selec ted the character for Np 42 21 point is twice as high and twice as wide as with a point size of Np 21 10 5 point The following commands use the character pitch set by this com mand ESC I ESC left and right margin BS backspace ESC D setting of horizontal tabs If a proportional font is selected the character pitch for these com mands is calculated from the following formula Character pitch 360 INT point size 36 10 5 0 5 cpi Downloadable characters If characters have been downloaded into the printer from the sy stem or by means of the copy function these characters are printed as follows after defining the character pitch with this command Downloadable characters by means of the copy function Character pitch Size
77. automatic cut sheet feeder accessory 3 12 Chapter 3 Paper handling Setting the top of page Top Of Form With the Top Of Form function you can set the line where print ing is to start the so called top of form A clear paper guard is fitted at the front on the print head car riage The red line arrow is the position on the current line at which the characters are print ed This line is very useful when setting the top of form position and during general printer op eration gt Note If you are using the Form Tear Off function you first have to switch this off in the printer menu Should you wish to change the start of printing in the vertical direc tion top of form proceed as follows 1 Transport the continuous paper to the next top of form or insert a cut sheet and let the printer automatically draw it in Both occur on pressing the FF LOAD button 2 Switch the printer OFF LINE by pressing the SEL button the SEL lamp lights 3 Set the top of form by holding down the SHIFT button and simul taneously pressing one of the Micro Feed buttons This will cause the paper to be transported Up or Down in steps of 1 180 inch 4 The top of form chosen is stored once you have released the but tons Switch the printer ON LINE again by pressing the SEL but ton Changing Top of Form If you are using for example a text processing program which automatically sets a top margin
78. bar code data are added The total is divided by 43 and the remainder is the checksum C 11 Appendix Bar codes Table 5 Character Value Character Value Character Value 0 0 F 15 U 30 1 1 G 16 31 2 2 H 17 w 32 3 3 I 18 x 33 4 4 J 19 Y 34 5 5 K 20 Z 35 6 6 L 21 36 7 7 M 22 27 8 8 23 Space 38 9 9 O 24 39 A 10 25 40 11 Q 26 41 12 R 27 42 D 13 5 28 14 T 29 Example bar code data 123LPJ23 Addition of values 1 2 3 25 21 19 1 2 3 77 Division 77 43 1 Remainder 34 Value 34 character Y Checksum character Y Calculating the Checksum for Code 128 Each of the characters of Code 128 is assigned a reference value When calculating the checksum these values are added after they have been multiplied by a weighting The weighting starts at 1 and is increased by the value 1 for every digit In addition the reference value of the start digit is added The total modulo 103 is the checksum The reference values are listed in Table 6 The different characters are divided into three character sets Code A B C Character set C consists exclusively of two digit numbers 00 to 99 Each two digit number is assigned a bar code unit This results in a higher informa tion density C 12 Appendix Bar codes Example bar code data 1234XYZg Start in character set C change to character set A a Ref Start character Set C 105 b Ref character 12 12 c Ref charac
79. calculation of column sums is to be found on the pre vious pages After calculating the sums for each column s s etc the complete instruction reads LPRINT 27 144 CHRS 1 CHR s CHR s 5 00 The format is the same for all graphics Merely the commands for opening the graphics in the respective resolutions and the maxi mum number of column bytes vary The value in a column which portrays a certain dot pattern is always the same irrespective of the graphics resolution The number of dot columns specified by means of n and n must not exceed the maximum number of dot columns per line for the respective graphics density 11 9 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Aspect ratio 5 6 quasi 8 pin graphics Aspect ratio Function Dec Hex ASCII Set aspect ratio 27110m 1B6Em ESC nm The aspect of 8 pin graphics on a 24 pin dot matrix printer is achie ved by grouping individual pins When doing this distortion of the image may occur The command ESC n selects a ratio between the horizontal and ver tical resolution depending on the value m for the 8 pin graphic modes ESC ESC L ESC and ESC Z When 0 1 the ratio is 5 6 when m 2 it is fixed at 1 1 Values greater than 2 are ignored The standard setting is the ratio 5 6 the different graphic modes are first explained with this ratio and later with the ratio set at 1 1 Graphics of single dens
80. ceeded The condition of the support paper must ensure that the label is not removed when the paper is turned about 180 around a cylinder with a diameter of 27 mm The labels must not detach during the process of printing or paper feeding The support paper must be as bendable as possible No labels should be removed from the support paper A label must not have wrinkles or waves in the feed direc tion Labels on continuous paper Labels on continuous paper must only be fed from the bottom side of the printer with additional transportation unit for continuous paper Appendix Paper formats and print areas The width of the label paper must be between 76 2 and 254 mm small printer and between 76 2 and 406 4 mm large printer You use paper lengths between 76 2 and 431 8 mm Do not print within 8 9 mm corresponds to 5 lines at 6 1 1 be fore and after a perforation to avoid printing on the perforation The support paper of the labels can be processed with a weight of 33 to 41 g m The overall thickness of 0 28 mm must not be exceeded The condition of the support paper must ensure that the label is not removed if the paper is turned about 180 around a cylinder with a diameter of 27 mm The labels must not detach during the process of printing or pa per feeding The support paper must be as bendable as possible No labels should be removed from the paper A label must not have
81. commands The commands available in AGM are indicated in the appropriate chapters Print Mode You can select here the required font for the document Pitch You set here the character width in characters per inch cpi Proportional Spacing The fonts in letter quality can optionally be printed with proportional spacing Style You select normal or italic characters Size You can switch between single font size and combination of expanded horizontal and vertical font Character Set You can select here between IBM character sets Set I and Set II In Epson emulation Set II corresponds to an extension of the printable characters Language Set When you select a national character set this replac es some characters with the special characters of the respective lan guage Zero Character Select Slashed if you wish zero to have a slash through it in order to better differentiate it from capital O Code Page A code page is a character set that contains country specific characters In IBM emulation it can be used as character set I and II or as a fully printable character set In Epson emulation all characters can be made available via the Extension of printable characters In addition certain characters in the lower range can be replaced by choosing a national character set Language Set Slashed Letter The characters 155 and Y 157 are replaced by and when Yes is selected Printer Control Font Symbol S
82. differ entiate between the data format 7 or 8 bits and the transmission format data bits plus parity bit set or not set Protocol Selects the interface protocol There are two protocols that can determine the sending and receiving of data In the case of the Ready Busy protocol the RTS SSD line indicates the print er s readiness to receive by means of the voltage level In the case of the X ON X OFF protocol sending receiving is controlled hand shake via special characters transmitted on the data line 4 14 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Diagnostic Test Activates a diagnostic test of the interface For fur ther information please refer to Appendix D Busy Line Defines the line to be used for the busy signal Baud Rate Defines the speed of data transmission DSR Signal Activates or deactivates the DSR signal data set ready DTR Signal Defines the status of the DTR signal data terminal ready Busy Time Selects the duration of the busy signal 4 15 Chapter 5 Printer Control Chapter 5 Printer Control Emulation An emulation is a copy of the functions of a specified device That means your printer is capable in a certain emulation of executing the commands and functions of this particular device In addition extra functions are in most cases provided that go beyond the perform ance specification of the emulated device Ez The IBM ProPrinter function Tobe able
83. from decimal 127 to 159 in the standard Epson Character Set is identical with that from decimal 0 to 31 while with extension of printable characters activated special characters are to be found in this range If the Epson character set is activated and the extension deactivated the selected character set is the same as the IBM cha racter set I Are both Epson character set and extension activated the selected set is similar to IBM character set II Function Dec Hex ASCII Activate italic 27 1160 1B 74 00 ESC t NUL character set Activate character 27 1161 1 74 01 ESC t SOH set selected by menu Activate loadable 27 1162 1B 74 02 ESC t STX character set Activate graphic 27 1163 1B 74 03 ESC t ETX character set With these commands in the Epson character set the range from decimal 160 to 255 can be filled either with the characters from the range from decimal 32 to 127 in italic or with graphic symbols and special characters of the Code Page selected in the menu With ESC t STX all characters from decimal 32 to 127 will be loaded into the upper half of the character set s range 160 to 255 14 20 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Select national character sets and Code Pages Select national character 27 82n 1B52n ESC Rn set and Code Pages With this command you can access special characters of a certain language If you want to activate one of these character sets you must insert th
84. general D 22 Bottom tractor feed connections D 29 general 7 18 pin assignment D 23 different paper formats 7 24 test D 36 installation feed 7 20 transmission protocol D 26 installation feet 7 18 Cut sheet feeder paper feed 7 22 automatic paper feed 7 8 Button functions menu mode 2 7 feed rail 7 2 Button functions ON OFF LINE mode 2 5 installation 7 5 Buttons 2 5 manual paper feed 7 9 mounting bracket 7 11 paper feed 7 7 paper tray 7 10 Centronics Interface 2 3 D 1 printing area 7 10 Changing 7 12 Cut sheet print position 3 14 7 12 paper feet 3 7 Tear Off position 3 16 format E 4 the menu settings 4 2 print area 4 the ribbon cassette 6 1 weight 5 CHARACTER PITCH 2 7 Characters and control characters 5 3 Cleaning the printer 6 3 F 1 Appendix Index Glossary D G Damage transportation XIX Dimensions printer A 4 Downloadable characters Epson 15 12 E Electrical characteristics A 4 Emulation 1 11 5 1 End menu mode 4 3 Environmental conditions A 4 Epson commands ESC P2 commands 14 27 15 17 Bit image graphics 15 1 Character Sets 14 20 17 1 Control code tables 16 1 Cut Sheet Feeder 14 19 Downloadable characters 15 12 High resolution graphics 15 4 Line spacing 14 17 Low resolution graphics 15 8 Multifunction commands 14 8 Other commands 14 22 Page formatting 14 15 Paper feed 14 18 Positioning
85. in doubt ask your supplier that the printer is connected to an earthed mains socket by means of the power cable supplied when using an extension cable or multiple socket that you do not exceed the maximum electrical load for this 1 2 Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up all reasonable precautions have been taken to prevent damage to the power cable Do not place objects on the cable and make sure it is routed so that nobody walks on it or trips over it e that a damaged cable is replaced immediately you have removed the mains plug from the socket to ensure complete isolation from the power supply The socket provided for this must be located close to the printer and easily accessible Setting up the printer Removing the transport packing 1 Ifaclear protective film is at tached to the cover of the printer you can remove this 2 Open the cover of the printer and remove the transport packing Make sure you keep this with the other packing material in case you have to transport the printer later on Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up o Inserting the ribbon cassette Original ribbon cassettes are specially developed for your print er Among other things this concerns the ink which contains lubricants and the fabric of the ribbon A Warning The use of non original ribbons can result in damage to the print head Use only the manufacturer s original ribbons
86. line feed of n 360 inch no carriage return is execut ed despite the settings of the printer menu If 0 is set for the param eter n in this command no line feed is executed If the Alternate Graphics Mode is activated in the menu line feed by ESC J nis n 180 inch The command ESC NUL m m p p sets the basis for line spacing is set in increments of 1 n inch for the commands ESC A ESC 3 and ESC J e The parameters m and m define the basis for line spacing for the command ESC A m integer value 256 m m 256 When the printer is turned on the basis for line spacing for ESC A is set to 1 72 inch in AGM mode to 1 60 inch 10 18 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions e The parameters p and p define the basis for line spacing for the commands ESC 3 variable line spacing and ESC J variable line feed p integer value n 256 p n p 256 When the printer is turned on the basis for line spacing for ESC 3 and ESC J is set to 1 216 inch in AGM mode to 1 180 inch The following table shows the permissible values for the parameters m m and p p Values that are not listed in the table will be ignored m p m p Function 00 00 no change 48 00 Basis of 1 48 inch 72 00 Basis of 1 72 inch 96 00 Basis of 1 96 inch 120 00 Basis of 1 120 inch 144 00 Basis of 1 144 inch 180 00 Basis of 1 180 inch 216 00 Basis of 1 216 inch 240 00 Basis of 1 240 inch 160 05 Bas
87. of paper including the original when using duplicating paper The width b must be between 76 2 254 mm for small print ers and between 76 2 and 406 4 mm for large printers Youcan use paper lengths between 76 2 and 431 8 mm Do not print within 8 9 mm corresponding to four lines at six Ipi before and after a perforation in order to avoid printing on the perforation For 5 you can select a distance of 6 35 to 222 mm to the trans portation holes by moving the spiked cylinders Paper with binding holes must not be printed on the left of these holes 76 2 to 431 8 mm b 76 2 to 254 mm 76 2 to 406 4 mm printable width d 16 9 mm e 12 7 mm f 6 35 mm g 6 35 to 22 2 mm 12 7 mm Format Appendix Paper formats and print areas Weight Paper Thickness Perforation When using single layer paper the respective first character can be printed at a distance of 6 35 mm to the transportation holes To avoid printing on the perforation maintain a distance of 12 7 mm to the perforation When using multiple layer paper do not print within 12 7 mm of the transportation holes to avoid an impairment of the print quality by glued surfaces Continuous paper without duplicate The weight must be between 45 and 90 g m the paper thickness must not exceed 0 36 mm Multiple sets automatically duplicating Multiple sets automatically duplicating
88. off via the control panel by simultaneously pressing the SHIFT and PRINT QUALITY keys If this mode is activated the data in the printer memory are printed out With this mode switched on the following commands cause indication of the next print position by the above mentioned mark ing space with print head positioning 255 dec FF hex backspace BS horizontal tab HT carriage return CR line feed commands form feed FF commands for defining the next print position de lete buffer CAN delete character DEL If the functions Underline or Overscore are switched on then spaces with positioning i e spaces skipped by horizontal tab or position ing commands are underlined or overscored the next print posi tion is then not displayed Page formatting Function Dec Hex ASCII Page length in lines 2767n 1B43n ESCCn n 0to 50 Page length in inches 27670n 16 43 00 ESCCNULn n 1 to 255 By selecting page length you can inform the printer of the size of the paper used When the printer is switched on the current position of the print head is registered as Top of Form i e as the first print line on the page When printing forms it is important that the page length is set to the dimensions of the form so that not only the first but also all following form sets are printed in the right position Indicate next print position Set page length 10 13 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Setting Top o
89. page length When using these two commands to change the page length the form start position is reset a Skip over Perforation defined by command is deactivated and the value for the skip over perforation selected in the menu item is used Set vertical tabs are deleted Function Dec Hex ASCII Activate Skip over 2778n 1B 4E n ESCNn Perforation 1 127 Deactivate Skip over 27 79 1B 4F ESC O Perforation With this function the lower area of a page can be skipped automa tically Set page length Skip over Perforation 14 15 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Set margins Margins should always be set at the start of a line There is a Form Feed to the start of the next page Top of Form The parameter n designates the lines to be skipped to the start of the next page The lower margin actually to be skipped depends on the current line spacing Subsequent changes of line spacing have no effect on the bottom margin to be skipped All line feed com mands which place the print position in the area to be skipped cau se ajump to the start of the next page If Skip over Perforation is set at Yes in the printer menu a bottom area of one inch 2 54 cm is skipped to the next Top of Form The number of lines to be skipped can be selected with the above Skip command The command ESC O switches off the Skip Over Perfo ration function The commands for setting page length similarly switch off Skip over Perfor
90. position Pitch Narrow printer Wide printer 10 cpi Proportional 79 135 12 cpi 95 162 15 cpi 119 203 17 1 cpi 136 232 20 cpi 159 255 Function Dec Hex ASCII Skip to next vertical tab 11 OB VT Set vertical tabs 27 66 1B 42 ESC n n 0 n n 00 n n NUL n 1to16 n 1 to 255 No vertical tabs are set when the printer is switched on Up to 16 vertical tab positions can be set the positions are defined as line numbers They must be entered in ascending order and end with a NUL cha racter The parameter n indicates the line number of the first tab n to n accordingly the line numbers of the other tabs to be set Up to 16 vertical tabs can be defined n n ESC NUL deletes all vertical tabs 2 If the command VT is entered without any defined tab position a line feed is executed The actual position of a tab mark depends on the actual line spacing when loading the vertical tabs and does not move when line spa cing is changed absolute position With the skip command for the vertical tabulator the paper is transported to the next tab position 14 10 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions If a skip command is entered without further vertical tab positions being set a line feed is executed Function Dec Hex ASCII Vertical tabulator Select vertical 27 47 tabulator channel channel 1B 2 ESC n Load vertical format 2798n 1B62n ESCbn m m m mM Ilo f 0 00 NUL k 1to 16 n 0to
91. set in the soft ware In the printer menu it is possible to select the tray that is to be active as default on switching on the printer Please refer to Chapter 4 Printer menu settings for this In addition there are programming commands for choosing the tray in the respective emulations Remove the cut sheet feeder from the switched off printer by re peating the installation steps in the reverse order The paper feed rail must also be removed Now refit the paper separator and paper support as described in Chapter 1 7 10 Chapter 7 Accessories Should you wish to fit a narrow cut sheet feeder onto a wide print er you will have to fit the mounting bracket for the wide roller as described below You will need a cross head screwdriver for this purpose 1 Undo and remove screw Screw Mounting bracket on the inside of the output tray 2 Turn the cut sheet feeder over and place it on a steady level surface The two screws B are now accessi ble Screws B 3 Undo and remove the screws B at both ends of the mounting bracket 4 Carefully remove both parts of the mounting bracket from the cut sheet feeder 5 Move the left bracket rail ap proximately 5 mm to the left Align the fixing hole precise ly to the pin and the thread ed hole on the cut sheet feed er and screw the left screw B in again Adjusting the moun ting bracket 7
92. supplier ALARM SEL 10 cpi 15 Description E i The stock of paper has run out up with new paper x The paper lever is set to the cut sheet symbol TOP although continuous paper is being used Transport the continuous paper to the PARK position or choose another means of feeding the continuous paper x paper jam has occurred Remove the paper and make sure the paper path is free Press the SEL button x The print head the LF or space motor became too hot the printer automatically reduced its through put Should the ALARM indicator lamp start blinking refer to the fol lowing table If the remedies described are not successfull contact your supplier 8 4 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting UTL PRES 10 12 cpi 20 cpi PROP Description The serial interface card is incorrect ly installed Remove the card and re install it The drive of the print head carriage space motor is jammed or faulty Make sure that no foreign material is preventing the carriage from moving correctly staple paper dust etc The print head is not seated correctly on the print head carriage Remember that the print head is sometimes hot Open the clip that fastens the print head to the carriage Press the print head carefully down wards Inspect it to check that the head is correctly seated in its holder Now close
93. that they align on the right hand side Screws Chapter 7 Accessories 3 Align the holes of the exten sion precisely to the holes of the rail 4 Fasten the screws once again Extended in this way the paper feed rail will now fit the wide printer If on the other hand you are using the narrow print er the rail must not be extend ed Install the feed rail as follows Installing the feed rail A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down Chapter 7 Accessories Switch the printer off and open the printer cover Remove the paper support see also Chapter 1 Remove the ribbed paper separator by first pulling it forwards and then removing it from its catch arrangement see also Chapter 1 Fit the feed rail with its mounting brackets at both ends of the platen You should hear it click into place Gently tilt the rail back wards Chapter 7 Accessories 1 Install the cut sheet feeder with its mounting brackets onto both ends of the platen shaft so that it is firmly seated Installing the cut sheet feeder 2 Turn the platen knob so that the gearwheel on
94. the assignment of the bits of a graphic byte to the pins of the print head depends on the resolution selected Graphics of single density with a aspect ratio of 1 1 have a resoluti on of 60 x 60 dots per inch The assignment of bits of a graphic byte to the pins of the print head is shown in the following table bit number of the graphic byte assigned printer pins 7 MSB 1 3 6 4to 6 5 9 9 4 10 to 12 3 13 to 15 2 16 to 18 1 19 to 21 0 LSB 22 to 24 Graphics of double density with normal or half speed at a aspect ratio of 1 1 have a resolution of 120 x 60 dots per inch At this resolu tion only 12 of the 24 pins of the print head are used per graphic byte In order to increase the throughput the printer under certain con ditions prints two graphic lines in one pass if this is possible The following table shows the assignment of pins when printing out a two line graphic of double density in one pass Aspect ratio 1 1 11 11 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics bit number of the graphic byte assigned printer pins and 2 and 3 and 5 and 6 and 8 9 1 2 and and and O QI 2 7 MSB 13 and 14 6 14 and 15 5 16 and 17 4 17 and 18 3 19 and 20 2 20 and 21 1 22 and 23 0 LSB 23 and 24 In order to guarantee the grouping of graphic lines described abo ve the following conditions must be fulfilled The line spacing must be 8 120 inch The command sequences with ESC L or ESC Y c
95. the associated manual whether you can alter the initialisation string If this is the case delete the unwanted commands the menu and print function buttons are inoperative The function of the buttons can be deactivated by means of the menu item Operator Panel Functions of the printer menu If the printer is part of a network or is shared by several people the re spective system administrator has probably used this option to pre vent the printer settings being altered indiscriminately Hold down the MENU button when switching on to be able to alter this item if I wish to check the data sent by the computer to the printer Use the hex dump mode To activate this mode hold down the FF LOAD button and the SEL button when switching on the printer All data sent to the printer including text and printer commands will then be printed in hexadecimal form and ASCII format When you wish to return to normal print mode switch the printer off an then on again 8 3 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Faults that can be remedied by the user status of the indicator lamp unchanged indicator lamp is lit X indicator lamp is blinking Fault tables Malfunctions are indicated by the blinking of the ALARM lamp The other lamps show the type of fault The messages listed point to faults that can generally be remedied by the user If the fault message appears again after you have un dertaken the remedy described contact your
96. the fastening clip Any other messages refer to more serious faults see also the follow ing table Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Major faults The following fault messages are unlikely to be displayed in normal use They are listed here for the sake of completeness Should any of these faults occur contact your supplier The ALARM lamp also blinks when these faults occur the follow ing lamps light permanently in addition 10 cpi 15 cpi 17 cpi 20 cpi PROP UTL PRES BOLD Cause MPU internal RAM Program ROM RAM internal character generator EEPROM Firmware time moni toring Firmware NMI signal Firmware BRK com mand Serial interface card MPU internal RAM Serial interface card ROM Serial interface card RAM Head positioning Print head gap Print head contact LF space motor driver 8 6 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Testing options The printer is provided with a number of simple means for testing that it is functioning correctly Use one of the available tests when you wish to check whether the printer is working properly Details on the program version and emulation of your printer are contai ned in the header above the following test print outs Keep this in formation handy in case you need to contact the service depart ment This test can be used to check both the print quality and the pa
97. the left end of the sheet feeder engages with the gearwheel of the platen 3 Close the printer cover 4 Connect the cable of the cut sheet feeder to the printer by plugging it into the socket provided to the left rear of the printer The arrow on the plug shows the correct way to plug it in Chapter 7 Accessories Fit the rear paper stand or stands as the case may be onto the rail of the paper guide Now insert the front paper stand To ensure that the machine feeds and handles the paper perfectly the paper lever at the right end of the printer must point to the cut sheet symbol middle position TOP Switch the printer on Chapter 7 Accessories The paper tray of the cut sheet feeder has a maximum capacity of Paper feed 100 sheets 90 g m or 170 sheets 60 of standard paper A mark on the left guide rail indicates the maximum amount of paper Read also the further notes on paper in Chapter 3 1 Set the paper set lever at the right end of the cut sheet feeder upwards to the RE SET position The paper tray will open towards the back A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted 2 Take a stack of paper fan it to part the sheets and insert it into the sheet feeder Make sure the stack of paper is ly ing on the bottom of the tray
98. the top edge of the paper is to be set as the top of form Do not forward paper to the new top of form position by using the platen knob Chapter 3 Paper handling gt Note To set the top of form to the standard setting simultaneously press the SHIFT and TOF buttons There must be no paper in the print path when doing this 5 The top of form can be set differently for each type of paper feed irrespective of whether you are feeding cut sheets manually us ing the cut sheet feeder CSF or using continuous paper Indicating or changing the print position The current print position is indicated by the M above the red line located on the clear paper guard of the print head carriage Should you wish to find out where the next printing position will be simultaneously press the SHIFT and PRINT QUALITY buttons The print head carriage will then move automatically to the new printing position If when printing on pre printed forms it is necessary to correct the current printing position in a horizontal direction or change to the next printing position proceed as follows Print position M 1 Make sure that the printer is ON LINE the SEL lamp lights 2 Simultaneously press the SHIFT and TEAR buttons and the print head will move to the left On pressing the SHIFT and PARK buttons the print head will move to the right The distance the print head moves between the individual printi
99. this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 2 all Ln Hn 256 2 data following Pn are ignored The parameters Lp and Hp specify the relative vertical shift of the print position in multiples of the current basic step size Printable area Function Dec Hex ASCII Setting of the page 27 40 99 1 28 63 ESC format in basic step sizes Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Lb Hb Lb Hb Lb Hb Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lt 0 to 255 Ht 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lb 0 to 255 Hb 0 to 255 MSB ignored This command defines the top and bottom non printable areas of the currently selected paper path The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of parameters follo wing this Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 For this command Hn 0 and Ln 4 must be set With Ln Hn 256 lt 4 this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 4 all Ln Hn 256 4 data following Lp Hp are ignored The parameters Lt Ht Lb and Hb define the top TP and bottom BP non printable areas in whole multiples of the current basic step size measured from the previously defined top of page positi on TOF Define print areas 14 33 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Ht integer TP in basic step sizes 256 Lt TP in basic step sizes Hp 256 Hb integer page length BP in basic step sizes 256 Lb page length BP in basic step sizes Hp 256
100. to use your printer with as many applications as possible it is provided with the emulations IBM ProPrinter IBM ProPrinter Load down user defined AGMand E n LO characters into the printer VORNE pas Q DLL is not supported by this printer model Printer drivers In order to be able to write application programs not designed for specific output devices such as a screen or printer they are mostly provided with exchangeable program parts responsible for output ting the data so called drivers A driver receives generally required outputting instructions from its own program and translates these into the special commands and functions of the printer for which the driver was written When installing or setting up printer drivers you should always refer to the manual for the respective program as the programs may be available in versions written both at differ ent times and for different countries For that reason the notes given here may not always be applicable to your program but are to be taken as generally applicable You will obtain the best support for your printer if you use a printer driver which precisely matches the name of your printer If there is no matching driver in your program choose a driver for one of the emulations named below Make sure that the printer driv er agrees with the emulation you set in the menu of the printer To select another suitable printer driver go through the following list from top to b
101. wrinkles or waves in the feed direction The corners of the labels must be rounded off A hole in the label corresponding to the horizontal perforation of the paper must be identical with the perforation Holes must not appear within a range of 1 to 2 mm from both edges There should not be any holes within 0 5 to 1 mm length from the upper right or left edge Format Weight Further information Appendix Index Glossary Appendix F Index Glossary BOLD BLOCK CAPITALS represent the display lamps of the control panel Bold letters indicate the groups positions and settings of the printer menu e BLOCK CAPITALS indicate the mode of the printer e Italic BLOCK CAPITALS indicate the buttons of the control panel A C Accessories 1 7 1 Code pages overview B 1 Activate menu mode 4 1 Connecting the printer to power supply 1 10 Adjusting print head gap 3 3 Connecting the printer to the computer 1 9 Advice symbols XVII Consumables XVIIL 6 1 Agency Approvals A 5 Continuous ASCII test 8 7 ALARM 2 4 8 1 Continuous paper Assembling the printer 1 1 1 2 feed 3 8 Available fonts test 8 8 format E 1 perforation E 2 B print area E 1 weight E 2 Bar codes C 1 Conversion table B 2 examples C 17 Coresident RS 232C technical data D 22 positioning 2 Coresident 5 232 Current Loop Interface D 22 print position 20 COURIER 2 7 BOLD 2 7 Current Loop Interface Bottom Feed 4 10
102. writing 1B 10 41 08 01 00 02 04 07 01 01 00 Select bar code 1B 10 42 0 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Print bar code 39 30 31 40 C 17 Appendix Bar codes Zip Code Bar code UPC E 1 6 inch high small width plain writing LQ 1B 10 41 08 01 04 00 02 02 01 01 02 Select bar code 1B 10 42 06 31 32 33 34 35 36 Print bar code Bar code Code 39 0 5 inch high medium width plain writing LQ 1B 10 41 08 02 00 00 06 02 02 02 01 Select bar code 1B 10 42 12 4F 4B 49 20 42 41 52 43 Print bar code 4F 44 45 20 44 52 55 43 4B 40 Bar code Interleaved 2 5 1 inch high large width no plain writing 1B 10 41 08 03 00 01 02 04 04 04 00 Select bar code 1B 10 42 04 31 32 33 40 Print bar code Bar code 128 Set A 0 5 inch high smallest width plain writing LQ 1B 10 41 08 04 00 00 06 01 01 01 02 Select bar code 1B 10 42 0 41 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Print bar code 37 38 39 67 Printing a ZIP Code Function Dec Hex ASCII Zip Code 27 16 67 1B 10 43 ESC DLE C p n n p n p DATA This command is used for printing a zip code 1 p is the amount of data according to p MSB is invalid p is valid from 01H to 14H If the value of p is not within this range the command will be ignored If p 1 is sent together with a checksum the command will also be ignored 2 DATA stands for zip code data MSB is invalid C 18 Appendix Bar codes 9 Valid data is within the range 0 30H to 9 39H If the
103. 00000 NUL NUL n NUL NUL n Function Dez Hex ASCII Cut Sheet Feeder control Insert single sheet 27 25 73 1B 19 49 ESC EMI Eject single sheet 27 25 82 1B 19 52 ESC EM R Select bin 1 27 25 49 1B 19 31 ESC EM 1 Select bin 2 27 25 50 1B 19 32 ESC EM 2 Select Cut Sheet Feeder 27 91 70 1B 5B 46 ESC 30m 03 00 m ETX NUL m m m m m m Function Dez Hex ASCII IBM Character sets IBM Chararacter Set I 27 55 1B 37 ESC7 IBM Chararacter Set II 27 54 1B36 ESC 6 Select national character 2733n 1B21n ESC n set Select Code Page 27 91 84 1B5B54 50 05 00 ENO NUL 00 00 00 NUL NUL n n 0 00 n n NUL 12 5 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables All Character set Other commands Function Dez Hex ASCII Print a character from 27 94 1 5 ESC n the all character set Print several characters 27 92 1B 5C ESC from the all character set n n n n n n Function Dez Hex ASCII Carriage return 13 0D CR Backspace 8 08 BS Delete buffer 24 18 CAN Activate automatic line 27 53 49 1B 35 31 ESC 51 feed Deactivate automatic line 275348 1B 35 30 ESC 50 feed Start unidirectional 27 85 49 1B 55 31 ESCU1 printing Stop unidirectional 27 85 40 1B 55 30 ESCUO printing Start print suppress 2781n 1B51n ESC Qn Stop print suppress 17 11 DC1 Printer OFF LINE 27 106 ESC j Deactivate end of paper 27 56 1B 38 ESC 8 sensor Activate end of paper 27 57 1B 39 ESC 9 sensor Select font via pitch 27 16 70 1B 10 46
104. 1 4 14 4 14 Button functions in ON LINE OFF LINE mode Button functions in menu mode Print functions PRINT QUALITY CHARACTER PITCH RESET Paper handling Notes on paper types Paper lever Adjusting for the paper thickness Print head lever Adjusting the print head gap Paper feed cut sheets Paper feed continuous paper Feeding continuous paper from the rear Feeding continuous paper from the bottom Switching between continuous paper and cut sheets From continuous paper to cut sheets From cut sheets to continuous paper Setting Top of Form Changing Top of Form Indicating or changing print position Automatic advance to Form Tear Off position Checking Top of Form Changing the Tear Off position Printer menu settings The printer menu Activate menu mode Print menu settings Changing the menu settings End menu mode Layout of the printer menu Explanation of menu items Printer Control Font Symbol Sets Rear Feed Bottom Feed Top Feed Set Up Parallel I F Serial I F IX Chapter 5 5 1 5 1 5 3 5 3 5 5 5 6 Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 5 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 10 7 10 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 15 7 17 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 20 7 22 7 24 Printer Control Emulation Printer drivers Characters and control characters Printing under DOS Printing under DOS with serial interface Troubleshooting Consumables and cleaning Changing the ribbon cassette Inserting a new ribbon cas
105. 1 Replace the old support with 2 Place the hooks of the roll the new paper support pro vided with the roll paper stand The paper support is installed as described in Chapter 1 paper stand precisely in the cutouts of the paper support and tilt the support back wards The connecting cable will point to the back when this is done 3 Connect the cable plug of the roll paper stand to the socket on the back of the printer The arrow on the plug shows the correct way to plug it in Insert the roll paper as described below 1 Insert the roll shaft into the core of the paper roll and open the paper guide of the roll paper stand Insert the shaft into the roll paper stand so that the slotted end of the shaft engages in the slot of the left holder and the paper runs off from the bottom 7 26 Chapter 7 Accessories 2 Slip the paper beneath the platen from the back with the edges of the paper lying against the platen Now turn the platen knob to feed the paper around the platen A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted 3 Set the paper lever to the rear position Align the left and right edges of the paper with the edges of the paper fed in from the back When the roll paper is aligned properly return the paper lever to the middle position 4 Switch on the printer The pr
106. 11 Chapter 7 Accessories Checking the items supplied 6 Move the right bracket rail approximately 15 cm to the right the mounting bracket is now extended to approxi mately 45 cm wide Align the fixing hole precisely to the pin and the threaded hole on the cut sheet feeder and refit the right hand screw B 7 Turn the cut sheet feeder over and fasten the screw A to the inside right of the output tray Replace the cut sheet feeder on the printer as described further on The pull tractor feed You feed continuous paper from the bottom when you wish to print types of paper that are not suitable for feeding around the platen Such types of paper are multi part forms adhesive labels on backing paper and other special papers You will need to use a pull tractor feed for this Check that the individual items supplied are complete and un damaged You should have re ceived depending on the mo del 1 tractor feed narrow or wide 1 acoustic cover narrow or wide Remove the packing material Keep the original packing material safe so that you can transport the tractor feed safely at a later date if necessary 7 12 Chapter 7 Accessories To install the tractor feed proceed as follows Installation A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution
107. 12 cpi 6 cpi 15 cpi 7 5 cpi 17 1 cpi 8 5 cpi 20 cpi 10 cpi If proportional spacing is activated the use of double width print ing gives double width proportional printing As this does not have a fixed pitch it is not shown in the table Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions For certain applications the maximum number of characters in a line has to be indicated This depends on the pitch selected The following table shows the maximum number of characters per line Pitch Characters per line Narrow printer Wide printer 5 cpi 40 68 6 cpi 48 81 7 5 cpi 60 102 8 5 cpi 68 116 10 cpi 80 136 12 cpi 96 163 15 cpi 120 204 17 1 cpi 137 233 20 cpi 160 272 Function Dec Hex ASCII Start proportional spacing 27 80 49 1B5031 ESCP1 Stop proportional spacing 27 80 48 1B 50 30 ESC P 0 With proportional spacing the spacing between the individual let ters varies according to the respective character width With a fixed pitch all characters are created within a matrix of the same width Proportional spacing however gives wide characters such as w or M more space and narrow characters such as I or f less space The result is an attractive and more legible print image than with a fixed pitch Because of the different character widths proportional fonts do not have a fixed pitch Precise margin settings in the case of full justi fied text for example is only possible if the word processing pro gram supports propor
108. 14 12 Print alignment 15 11 Print attributes 14 6 Print modes 14 2 Print quality 14 1 Raster graphics 15 17 Standard functions 14 1 Tabulators 14 9 Explanation of menu items 4 9 F Fault tables 8 4 Feed rail adjusting 7 2 Feed rail installing 7 3 Feeding continuous paper from the bottom 3 11 Feeding continuous paper from the rear 3 8 FF LOAD 2 6 Fitting the interference filter 1 10 Fitting the paper separator 1 8 Fitting the paper support 1 5 Font 4 9 FORM TEAR OFF function 3 15 From continuous paper to cut sheets 3 12 From cut sheets to continuous paper 3 12 Front view 2 1 GOTHIC 2 7 Graphics Epson 15 1 15 17 Graphics IBM 11 1 GROUP 4 2 Guidance through the manual IV H Hex dump test 8 8 High resolution graphics Epson 15 4 High resolution graphics IBM 11 4 IBM commands Aspect ratio 11 10 Bit image graphics 11 1 Character Sets 10 21 13 1 Control code tables 12 1 Cut Sheet Feeder 10 20 High resolution graphics 11 4 Line spacing 10 16 Low resolution graphics 11 8 Multifunction commands 10 7 Other commands 10 26 Page formatting 10 13 Paper feed 10 18 Positioning 10 12 Print alignment 11 14 Print attributes 10 6 Print modes 10 3 Print quality 10 1 Standard functions 10 1 Tabulators 10 10 Indicating print position 3 14 Indicator lamps 2 4 Inserting a new ribbon cassette 6 2 Inserting the ribbon cassette 1 4 Inside view 2 2 Interface cards 7 28 Interface
109. 17 21 32 39 49 56 67 5 21 25 36 45 57 65 77 n 6 23 28 41 51 64 73 87 7 26 32 47 57 72 82 97 Unit 1 360 inch Table 4 Code 39 Interleaved 2 5 width of black elemt n defines the width of the narrow space element bar Together with n the total width of the wide space element can be taken from table 3 Appendix Bar codes Print Bar code Type n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ratio 1 5 2 2 5 3 35 4 narrow element 9 10 13 15 18 20 23 n1 15 17 23 27 33 37 43 2 19 21 28 33 41 46 53 n 3 22 24 33 39 48 54 63 4 25 28 38 45 56 63 73 5 27 31 43 51 63 71 83 n 6 31 35 48 57 71 80 93 n 7 34 38 53 63 78 88 103 unit 1 360 Zoll Printing a 24 Pin Bar Code Function Dec Hex ASCII Printing a Bar code 27 16 66 1B 10 42 ESC DLE B PE P P Pa DATA DATA DATA This command does not select type and size of the bar code 1 P selects the type of Code 128 If Code 128 is not selected has Unit used is 360 dpi full printing is always unidirectional P is the amount of data according to to be omitted 41 H Code 128 Set A 42 H Code 128 Set B 43 H Code 128 Set C If P is assigned any value other than the above mentioned value the command will be ignored DATA Appendix Bar codes 5 Printing starts when the printer has received the entire com mand If P 0 the bar code cannot be printed 6 The following values are valid for P The check digit code is r
110. 18 lt 19 SP5 A ji 25 GND 7 SP1 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 obs Ready Busy XON XOFF oA B Centronics Blocked Duplex AB 0 This connection is equivalent to circuit diagram 12 A circuit cording to diagram 13 is not possible with the IBM Asynchronous Adapter as the voltage supplied by this adapter s power source is not sufficient for the interfaces Please refer to the section Techni cal Note earlier on in this chapter You can use the Centronics Blocked Duplex protocol only in combi nation with above circuit Diagram 17 This connection is equivalent to circuit diagram 12 D 35 Appendix D Interface Data Interface Test Connect the test loop plug described below to the interface in order to perform an interface test Select Yes in the Diagnostic Test menu to enable the interface test of the printer Connect the test loop plug to Canon DB 25S or equivalent the connector of the serial in terface Connect short circuit jump er SP2 to side B and SP3 to side B to select the Current Loop operating mode Plug SP4 into side B and SP5 into side A to activate the inter face connection with two transmission lines and a power source on the printer side This circuit is equiva lent to diagram 14 Current Loop Turn the printer on The printer buffer
111. 3601 NTED ee o lt ORE OKI Systems Sweden AB Stormbyvagen 2 4 PO Box 131 163 55 Sp nga Sweden Tel 46 0 8 7955880 46 0 8 7956527 Systems Danmark a s Parkalle 382 2625 Vallensbaek Denmark Tel 45 0 43 666500 Fax 45 0 43 666590 OKI Europe Ltd Branch Office Prague IBC Pobrezni 3 186 00 Praha 8 Czech Republic Tel 42 2 2326641 42 Fax 42 2 2326621 OKI Europe Ltd Branch Office Poland UL Grzybowska 80 82 00840 Warsaw Poland Tel 48 2 6615407 Fax 48 2 6615451 OKI Europe Ltd Hungary International Trade Center H1051 Budapest Bajcsy Zsilinszky t 12 Hungary Tel 36 1266 6225 Fax 436 1266 0152 M OSD 02012 10 1A 1 97 Systems Deutschland GmbH Printed in Germany
112. 36mm 17 2 inches 587mm 23 1 inches height 147mm 5 8 inches 147mm 5 8 inches depth 404mm 15 9 inches 404mm 15 9 inches Electrical characteristics Voltage 230 V 410 14 Frequency 50 60 Hz 2 Power consumption Operation 60 W Standby 12W Energy Star Environmental Conditions Temperature Operation 5 to 40 C Storage 10 to 50 C at Power Off Rel Humidity Operation 20 to 80 Storage 5 to 95 no condensation Working noise according to ISO 7779 54 db A Letter Quality 55 db A Data Processing Quality 50 db A Data Processing Quality Quiet Mode Appendix Technical Data Reliability MTBF Mean Time Between Failures MTTR Mean Time To Repair printer life ribbon life print head life Options Agency Approvals 10 000 hours 25 duty cycle and 35 page density 15 minutes 12 000 hours 25 duty cycle and 35 page density 2 million characters depending on age of printing material text or graphic printing age of ribbon 200 million characters Pull Tractor narrow Pull Tractor wide Bottom Tractor narrow Bottom Tractor wide Cut Sheet Feeder 1 Bin narrow 1 Bin wide 2 Bin narrow 2 Bin wide Roll Paper Stand narrow Ribbon cassette black Interface cards RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C Current Loop FCC class A class B UL 1950 CSA 1950 EN 55022 class B CE EN 60950 GS BS EN 60950 BS IEC 950 App
113. 4 06 00 El gt gt Epson 18 52 3C n l lt 4 Dp T al 4 5 Fl o J 6 F V flv H 5 91 Y iy ole fall die J Z j z T n o ITP gt IM 1 m o gt N n lt a e 710 3456758945 c p Hebrew OC ID 1031 a os s s o z IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 0000 04 07 00 S vel T gt Epson 1B 52 3D lt 4 D T n Bin n lye H ele pn xe ab a R e 9 I Y 0 H lt 1 1 gt in n e 710 1 1 17 Appendix Code pages Windows Hebrew ID 1032 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 08 00 Epson 1B 52 3E Windows Baltic ID 1034 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 04 0A 00 Epson 1B 52 44 01213145 8 9 A B C D E F gt 0 P amp 1 4 Sp 2 lel 2 gel D 3 wi sisa cis f 5 4 4 4 n n 5 Yo 6 amp 6
114. 5 The Code Pages are available as IBM Character Sets I and II and as an all character set With the above command the Code Pages can be se lected via their ID numbers The parameters n and n determine the ID number of the Code Page to be selected in accordance with the following formula n integer value ID number 256 n ID number n 256 The overview shows the available Code Pages and their ID num bers You will find the Code Pages shown in a following chapter 10 24 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions ID Code Page n n 437 USA 1 181 774 Baltic 774 3 6 850 Multilingual 3 82 852 East Europe Latin II 3 84 855 Cyrillic I 855 3 87 857 Turkish 857 3 89 860 Portugal 3 92 863 French Canadian 3 95 865 Norwegian 3 97 866 Cyrillic II 866 3 98 869 Greek 869 3 101 895 Kamenicky MJK 3 127 1008 Greek 437 3 240 1009 Greek 928 3 241 1011 Greek 437 Cyprus 3 243 1012 Turkish 3 244 1014 Polish Mazovia 3 246 1015 ISO Latin 2 3 247 1016 Serbocroat I 3 248 1017 Serbocroat II 3 249 1018 ECMA 94 3 250 1019 Windows East Europe 3 251 1020 Windows Greek 3 252 1021 Latin 5 Windows Turkish 3 253 1022 Windows Cyrillic 3 254 1024 Hungarian CWI 4 0 1027 Ukrainian 4 3 1029 ISO Latin 6 4 5 1030 Hebrew NC 862 4 6 1031 Hebrew OC 4 7 1032 Windows Hebrew 4 8 1034 Windows Baltic 4 10 1072 Bulgarian 4 48 The following BASIC line selects Code Page 437 LPRINT 27 CHRS 91 CHRS 84 CHR 5 CH
115. 54 cm is always left unprinted when feeding cut sheets via the paper support or when using an automatic cut sheet feeder Page Width This menu item is only offered with wide printer mod els Select the page width for the paper you are using The standard setting is 13 6 inch Page Length Select here the page length for the paper you are us ing to ensure the initial printing position is the same for each page The page length set here is only used if the value By MENU Setting has been selected in the menu item Page Length Control Wait Time Where cut sheets are being fed from above via the pa per support the sheets are automatically drawn after the preset time 4 10 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Page Length Control Where cut sheets are being fed from above Top Feed the page length can be set via the menu or program commands by Menu Setting If however you set the value by Actual Page Length the page length is automatically detected by means of the end of page sensor Graphics Select Uni directional from left to right only to achieve more precise registration of graphics With Bi directional the printing speed is increased Receive Buffer Size Selects the volume of the receive buffer If you set a large size for the receive buffer the system can send greater volumes of data to the printer which then stores it in the buffer the printer is ready to receive data for a longer period and the transfer of data
116. 7 m 1 to 255 You can set up to eight separate vertical tabulator groups also cal led channels The corresponding command ESC b has the same for mat as ESC B Tab positions must be defined in ascending order and ended with NUL You must also define for which channel tabs are to be set by inserting a value between 0 and 7 for the variable n After setting the desired tabs in the respective channel being used you can move to a vertical tab by specifying a channel with ESC and then sending a VT command Example The following BASIC program sets tabs in three channels and then jumps to several vertical tabs in the various channels 10 20 30 40 50 60 2 I QOOQOE OOOt wv EM Vertical tabulator EM tabulator stop in c 0 30 40 50 PRINT 27 b C H HRS 0 EM tabulator stop in c 55 45 55 PRINT 27 b C HRS 15 35 CHR HRS 0 EM tabulator stop in c 4 48 channel hannel 0 line 10 0 CHR 10 5 20 30 40 50 hannel 1 line 5 15 1 5 45 55 hannel 2 line 12 14 11 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Horizontal dot position 70 LPRINT 27 b CHRS 2 12 CHRS 24 48 0 80 LPRINT 27 1 REM select channel 1 90 LPRINT 11 This is printed in line 5 100 LP
117. 9 D sseldorf Tel 49 0 211 5266 0 Fax 49 0 211 593345 BBS 49 0 211 596896 ISDN X 75 49 0 211 5266 222 analog 300 28800 bps 8 N 1 T Online Btx 222333 Internet http www oki osd com OKI Systems UK Ltd 550 Dundee Road Slough Trading Estate Berkshire SL1 4LE United Kingdom Tel 44 0 1753 819819 Fax 44 0 1753 819899 OKI Systems Ireland Ltd The Square Industrial Complex Tallaght Dublin 24 Ireland Tel 353 0 1 459 8666 Fax 4 353 0 1 459 8840 OKI Systems Belgium Leuvensesteenweg 542 bus 22 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 32 2 7160 550 Fax 32 2 7253 628 OKI People to People Technology Oki Data Corporation 4 11 22 Shibaura Minato ku Tokyo 108 Japan OKI Systems Holland b v Kruisweg 765 Postbus 690 2132 NG 2130 AR Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 0 20 6531531 Fax 4 31 0 20 6531301 OKI Syst mes France S A 40 50 Av G n ral de Gaulle 94240 L Hay les Roses France Tel 33 146158000 Fax 33 1 41240040 OKI Systems Italia S p A Centro Commerciale Il Girasole Palazzo Cellini Lotto 3 05 B 20084 Lacchiarella Milano Italy Tel 39 0 2 90076410 Fax 39 0 2 9007549 OKI Systems Espa a C Goya 9 Madrid 28001 Spain Tel 34 1 5777336 Fax 34 1 5762420 Systems Norway A S Hvamsvingen 9 PO Box 174 2013 Skjetten Norway 47 0 638 93600 Fax 47 0 638 9
118. ASIC is therefore CHRS 27 S CHRS 44 CHRS 1 With the command ESC the current print position can be moved to right or left in steps of 1 120 inches with Utility and 1 180 inches with Letter Quality The difference from absolute positioning is that the next print position in each case is calculated from the current print position If the print position is to be moved to the right you proceed as in the example shown above Moving the relative printing position to the left is a little more com plicated First determine the number of necessary dots and subtract this value from 65 536 2 6 Then calculate n and n using the above formula and enter the values as parameters in the command sequence If the respective dot position is outside the set margins the com mands for absolute or relative dot positioning are ignored There fore use the table below to find the maximum value in number of dots Print quality Narrow printer Wide printer UTL 120 dpi 960 1632 LO 180dpi 1440 2448 Function Dec Hex ASCII Start indication 27 1051 1B 6901 ESC i SOH Stop indication 27 1050 1B 6900 ESC i NUL With this command you can switch on and off the mode which en ables indication of the next print position The next print position is indicated by the character gt M lt on the red line which is on the trans parent paper protector at the front on the print head carriage This mode can also be switched on and off via the contro
119. American Standard Code for Information Interchange There are different national variations for this character set The so called control characters are common to all the character sets These are to be found at decimal positions 0 to 31 and effect functions such as page feed line feed or carriage return Some of these control char acters modify character widths and are described in the appropriate chapters The so called Escape character has a special significance among the control characters and is located at decimal position 27 hexadecimal 1B This control character introduces most commands for printers One or more ASCII characters follow which in conjunction with the Escape character activate or deactivate print functions At positions 32 to 255 are normally to be found printable characters It is often possible to obtain special printable characters at the positions of the control characters by triggering them with an appropriate com mand The commands are listed in ASCII decimal and hexadecimal form If you are using a programming language refer to your program ming manual for the transfer of characters and control characters to the printer Printing under DOS Most IBM PC and compatible PCs use MS DOS PC DOS DR DOS or similar as the operating system Although DOS has no print func tions like a text processing or graphics program direct printing of ASCII or print files is nevertheless possible under DOS In the exam pl
120. Bi directional Receive Buffer 8K 23K 1 Line Paper Out Override No Yes Print Registration 0 0 05mm 0 10mm 0 15mm 0 20mm 0 25mm Left 0 25mm Right 0 20mm 0 15mm 0 10mm 0 05mm Operator Panel Function Full Operation Limited Operation Reset Inhibit No Yes Print Suppress Effective Yes No Auto LF No Yes Auto CR No Yes CSF Bin Select Bin 1 Bin 2 SI Select Pitch 10 CPI 17 1 CPI 15 CPI SI Select Pitch 12 CPI 12 CPI 20 CPI Time Out Print Valid Invalid Auto Select No Yes Graphics Speed Low High Centering Position DEFAULT MODE1 MODE2 CSF Type Wide Narrow Chapter 4 Printer menu settings GROUP ITEM SET Parallel I F I Prime Buffer Print Buffer Clear Invalid _ Pin 18 5 V Open Auto Feed XT Invalid Valid The menu items of the group Serial I F only appear when a serial interface is installed The installation is described in the Accesso ries chapter further technical information on interfaces is to be found in the Interface Data appendix GROUP ITEM SET Serial I F Parity None Even Odd Serial Data 7 8 Bits 8 Bits 7 Bits
121. C GS 29 1D 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D RS 30 1E gt 62 A 94 5E 126 7E US 31 1 63 95 DEL 127 7F 17 3 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Conversion table The layout of this conversion table corresponds to the following character set tables The row and the column headers show the hexadecimal value of the characters The table contains de cimal and octal values Example hexadecimal 23 column 2 row 3 is equal to decimal 35 17 4 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Normal Character Set 0 9 je B 0 P p 1 ala 2 2 B R blr 2 BR bi r ESC t NUL ESC 7 3 4 sl4 p T d 5 5 5 0 6 6 amp 6 F V f v 7 lw w 8 x 8 H x hn x 9 8S 0 12345678 9 Graphics Character Set 0 4 1 1 2 2 gt ESC t SOH ESC 7 3 8 3lClS c s lt 4 1 2 5 5 A F 5S J 6 amp 6 F V f v H FIT n 7 7
122. Code 128 The bar code start character of the different character sets is se lected by choosing the option Pm of the command Printing a Bar Code ESC DLE B P1 Pm Data A stop character is printed automatically Appendix Bar codes The checksum code for character set A B and C are different Therefore you must ensure that the code of the character set se lected last is used Character set C consists of 100 two digit numbers with the value 00 to 99 This makes numerical display in double density possi ble Subsequently two bytes are combined to one character when character set C is used see Table 6 However if the amount of print data is an odd number a zero is added before the first number Otherwise a zero would be added to the last byte Example bar code data 555 The character string 0555 has to be sent to the printer A wrong character string 555 results in 5505 Examples The following are examples of the printing of bar codes and the command sequences in a hexadecimal format Bar code EANG 0 5 inch high smallest width plain writing LQ 1B 10 41 08 00 01 00 06 01 01 01 01 Select bar code 1B 10 42 08 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 Print bar code Bar code 3 1 inch high medium width plain writing LQ 1B 10 41 08 00 02 01 02 04 01 01 01 Select bar code 1B 10 42 OD 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Print bar code 39 30 31 32 40 Bar code UPC A 2 inch high largest width no plain
123. DATA is outside this range the command is invalid Printing quality is equivalent to 360 dpi Printing starts when the printer has received the entire com mand The checksum can be added by the printer by sending the char acter If the bar code data extends beyond the right margin the com mand will be ignored In this case a CR LF Carriage Return Line Feed will be performed After printing the bar code the print head is positioned at the end of the first printed line Height of the upper print process is 21 180 inch height of the lower print process is 7 180 inch A high bar is automatically added as start and stop character 10 Calculating the checksum All values are added The deficit to the next digit that can be divided by 10 is the checksum Example bar code data 123456789 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 45 b next digit which can be divided by 10 is 50 50 45 5 Checksum is 5 Example of a 9 digit Zip Code with checksum 1B 10 43 OA 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Selection and 39 40 Printing of Zip Code Appendix Bar codes Setting the print position Setting the Print Position Function Dec Hex ASCII Setting the Print 27 16 64 1B 10 40 ESC DLE Position PA PA Po A A P PO p P P P P P 1 The next horizontal position is set 2 Description of the parameters P jis the amount of data according to P MSB is invalid 06H is the default The command is inval
124. E 126 7E US 31 1F 63 95 DEL 127 7F 13 3 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets Conversion table The layout of this conversion table corresponds to the following character set tables The row and the column headers show the hexadecimal value of the characters The table contains de cimal and octal values Example hexadecimal 23 column 2 row 3 is equal to decimal 35 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets IBM Character Set IBM Character Set Il ESC 6 2 o o F IF L T T r TIT r T 6 gt 9 A B C D E F 8 Z f h GIW 41516 H X 8 ESC7 ESC6 13 5 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets IBM All Chracter Sets ESC oder ESC n National Character Sets ESC n Bem 0111213 4 819 P 0 4 1 1 4 1 e T 2 2 B E T gt lt 4 e T1
125. ESC nm Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Loadable characters Copy standard character 27580 1B3A00 ESC NUL set into DLL nO n 00 n NUL Generate downloadable 27 280 1B 26 00 ESC amp NUL characters nn dd n ndd nn d d Daten d Daten Daten Activate downloadable 27371 1B 25 01 ESC SOH character set Activate resident 27 37 0 1B 25 00 ESC NUL character set Replace top character 27 1162 1B 74 02 ESC t STX set with DLL character Additional ESC P2 command Function Dez Hex ASCII Set horizontal basic 27 99 1B 63 ESC c Raster graphics step size HMI Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Setting page length 27 40 67 1B 28 43 ESC in basic step sizes Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Setting of horizontal 27 40 85 1B 28 55 ESC U and vertical basic set Ln InHnPn Ln Hn Pn size Function Dez Hex ASCII Vertical print positioning Absolute vertical print 27 40 86 1B 28 56 ESC positioning in units Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn of the basic step size Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Relative vertical print 27 40 118 1B 28 76 ESC v positioning in units Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn of the basic step size Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp 16 7 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Printable areas Select font Character sets and Code Pages Raster graphics Function Dez Hex ASCII Setting of the page 27 40 99 1B 28 63 ESC format in basic step sizes Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Lt Ht Lt Ht Lt Ht
126. G wlg w lt 8 h x 3 ft 9 d J Zj i z K t k t SN 7 1 l 1 M 1 m gt 4 2 0 o 1 5 mn 17 5 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Normal Character Set Expansion ESC t SOH ESC 6 National Character Set ESC Rn Esco 2 4 6 SSTA B F 0 L E 1 A a 2 B b gt 3 lt 5 1 E f 5 o 1 F J 6 amp F f 7 G g 8 H h 3 9 I i J j K k BN E 1 D M m E N n 4 o mene 2 4 6 8 91 F 0 1 LIF 2 b gt 3 C c lt 4 L f 5 6 f 7 G g mI 8 H h 9 I amp d tr d A K k N C L 1 i uld m 1 N n A Ri dj s 7 1 17 6 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets This table shows the ASCII chararcter and the corre
127. If the interface s control program is stored in the microprocessor SP1 has to connect the two pins close to the interface connection Position B If the control program is stored in the EPROM SP1 has to con nect the two pins pointing away from the connection Position A Interface boards may vary in design D 5 Appendix D Interface Data Technical specifications of a cable for a serial RS 232C Interface 25 pin plug equivalent to DB25P Plug housing equivalent to DB C2 J9 Shielded Beldon cable or equiv alent with a maximum length of 15 m The cable should be a twisted pair cable to prevent s signal interference and must be UL and CSA certified The printer has a 25 pin DB 25S plug Pin Signal Direction Description Pin assignment P 1 Protective Ground PG Connected to printer s casing 2 Transmit Data TD From printer Serial signal sent from the printer 3 Receive Data RD To printer Serial signal received by the printer You can set Pin 4 11 or 20 4 Ready to Send RTS From printer Indicates that the printer as flow control line by is ready to receive data selecting the menu option C Busy Line 5 Clear to Send CTS To printer Indicates that system is ready to send data to printer You set the evaluation by 6 Data Set Ready DSR To printer Indicates that the selecting the menu option system is ready DSR Signal V
128. If the point size assignment is deleted i e no point size is selected the font is printed in the currently valid font size and the current charac ter pitch cpi 2 The size of a font scaled to 9 points has the same appearance as that to a scaled to 8 point The table below gives the assignment of selected character pitch Pn to the bitmap fonts used by the printer if scaling is not possible 14 37 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Dots 8 9 10 10 5 21 pitch Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Bitmap Print Pn cpi cpi cpi cpi 1 8 prop prop prop prop dbl hight dbl width 521 8 condensed 12 condensed 12 condensed 12 condensed dbl hight 22 24 8 10 condensed 10 condensed 10 condensed dbl hight 25 30 8 12 12 12 dbl hight 31 36 8 10 10 10 dbl hight 37 42 8 bold 10 bold 10 bold 10 dbl hight bold 43 48 8 dbl width 10 condensed 10 condensed 10 condensed dbl width dbl width dbl width dbl hight 49 60 8 dbl width 12 dbl width 12 dbl width 12 dbl hight dbl width 61 127 8 dbl width 10 dbl width 10 dbl width 10 dbl hight dbl width The following table shows the assignment of the selected font to the font used by the printer when scaling of the specified point size is possible selected font size bused by printer font 8 9 10 10 5 11 20 21 22 64 Courier Courier Courier Courier Courier Courier Roman Roman Roman Roman Roman Roman
129. R 4 7kQ R 3 3kQ 7415374 or equivalent 7407 or equivalent open collector D 3 Appendix D Interface Data Timing Parallel Data oa Bt STROBE lt 05 min BUSY _ gt L 250 ns min 4l lt 24 ys id 2 4 us ACKNOWLEDGE w ue Testing the To test the interface connection turn the computer and the printer Interface on POWER ON Write the following test programme 10 LPRINT Everything s okay 20 LPRINT 1 6 inch line spacing 30 LPRINT CHRS 12 REM Line Feed Type RUN and press the Return key You will get the following print out Everything s okay 1 6 inch line spacing If everything is working properly you can start printing Appendix D Interface Data RS 232C Serial Interface In a serial interface the bits of one byte are transmitted consecutive ly Additional lines control the flow of data This type of connection is often used with networks Using a serial interface large distances can be covered without any disturbances When using a serial interface correct wiring as well as correct set ting of the interface parameters configuration is of importance For most applications the default settings are sufficient Occasional ly you might have to change some parameters Never change val ues which are not described in your computer or network manual Jumper SP1 The position of jumper plug SP1 should never be changed
130. RINT CHRS 11 This is printed in line 35 110 LPRINT 27 2 REM select channel 2 120 LPRINT 11 This is printed in line 48 130 LPRINT 27 CHR 0 REM select channel 0 140 LPRINT CHR 11 This is printed in line 5 0 m Positioning Function Dec Hex ASCII Absolute horizontal 27 36 1B 24 ESC dot position n n n n n n n 0 to 255 n 0 to 3 Relative horizontal 27 92 1B5C ESC dot position n n n n n n n n 0 to 255 Using these commands you can position text or graphics exactly on a page Vertical positioning can also be achieved by variable line feed and by line spacing commands With the variables n and n in both commands a specific dot position can be defined at which the printout is to start The variable values are ascertained as follows n integer value dot position 256 n dot position n 256 The command ESC uses the default or set left margin as reference point and moves the respective print position in 1 60 inch steps For a narrow printer the maximum number of dots per 8 inches is 480 for a wide model 13 6 inches it is 816 dots With absolute posi tioning of 5 inches 300 60 from the left margin the calculation of the parameters looks as follows 14 12 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions integer value 300 256 1 n 300 1 256 44 The command in B
131. RS 0 CHRS 0 CHR 0 CHRS 1 CHR 181 CHRS 0 10 25 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Carriage return Backspace The Code Pages canalso be selected via the printer menu by changing the values in the Code Page menu item for example from USA to Multilingual The available Code Pages are shown in Appendix B Code Pages are used as tables of printable characters The character columns 2 to 7 and A to F are available in IBM Character Set I The IBM Character Set II enables you to have access to character colums 8 and 9 whereas IBM s All Printable Character Set gives you access to all 256 printable characters as described in the previous IBM Character Set section Other commands Function Dec Hex ASCII Carriage return 13 0D CR If this command is entered all data in the line buffer are printed and the next print position is set at the left margin For short line seeking the print head does not make these movements immedi ately the print position is only logically set at the left margin If Auto LF is set to Yes after each carriage return the printer executes a line feed command This command deactivates double width printing for one line Function Dec Hex ASCII Backspace 8 08 BS With this command the print position is set to the last received printable character This command is only executed if a printable character or a print command then follows The actual width of a backspace dep
132. SCII Start condensed 15 or OF or SI or printing 27 15 1B OF ESC SI Stop condensed 18 12 DC 2 printing The commands SI and ESC SI have identical functions If the print pitch is 10 cpi then 17 1 cpi is used in condensed printing With a print pitch of 12 cpi condensed printing is at 20 cpi If a DC2 com mand is sent the printer returns to the print pitch which applied before SI Function Dec Hex ASCII Start double width 27 87 49 1B 57 31 ESC W 1 Stop double width 27 87 48 1B 57 30 ESC W 0 Start double width 14 or OE or SO or for one line 27 14 1B 0E ESC SO Stop double width 20 14 DC 4 before end of the line With these commands you can extend characters to double their normal width If the actual character width is for example 12 cpi the printer will print at 6 cpi after a command for double width printing The following table shows all possible combinations The command Double width printing for one line is suitable for titles and headings as the function is automatically deactivated at the end of the line If double width printing command is to be cancel led before the end of a line you must send a DC4 or ESC W 0 com mand If double width printing is permanently activated via the command ESC W 1 this function can only be cancelled by entering ESC W 0 in this case DC4 has no effect Condensed printing Double width printing 14 3 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Double height printing
133. Valid values for the basic step size are 1 360 1 180 1 120 1 90 1 72 and 1 60 inch With the top margin limit measured from the top of page position is defined the top line of the printable area with the parameter for the bottom margin limit the bottom line of the printable area mea sured from the top of page position In the case of single sheets from the automatic cut sheet feeder or the optional sheet guide the areas of the top and bottom non prin table area are defined as follows when the menu item Page Length Control is set to the value by Menu Setting 0 inch lt top area lt bottom area lt 22 inches If the areas are set to 0 inches or to values more than 22 inches or these areas are set to invalid values this command is ignored With continuous paper and cut sheets by means of a cut sheet fee der the areas of the top and bottom non printable areas are defined as follows if the menu position Page Length Control is set to by Actual Page Length 0 inch top area bottom area page length If the areas are set to 0 inches or to values beyond the page length or these areas are set to invalid values this command is ignored A set up vertical format unit and set vertical tabs are not reset by this command A defined print area is not affected if the basic step size is changed later on If the printer is reset the print area in the initial setting becomes valid again 14 34 Chapter 14 Epson
134. X OFF protocol is used The Centronics Blocked Duplex transmission protocol can only be selected by setting short circuit jumper SP1 appropriately The functions of the short circuit jumpers and the menu settings are list ed in the following table Functions of short circuit jumper and protocol selection in printer menu Interface Protocol Power Number of SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 Menu Settings Source Lines RS 232C Ready Busy Ready RS 232C X ON X OFF A B A B X ON X OFF RS 232C CBD _ Current Loop Ready Busy passive 2 Current Loop Ready passive 4 Ready Busy Current Loop Ready Busy active 2 Ready Current Loop Ready Busy active 3 Ready Current Loop X ON X OFF passive 2 A B B A A Current Loop passive 4 X ON X OFF Current Loop active 2 A B B B A X ON X OFF Current Loop active 3 A B C B B X ON X OFF D 24 Appendix D Interface Data Interface Protocol Power Number of SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 Menu Settings Source Lines Current Loop CBD passive 2 B B B yu Current Loop CBD passive 4 B B C A Current Loop CBD active 2 B B B B A Current Loop CBD active 3 B B C B B CBD Centronics Blocked Duplex Protocol setting in menu will not be app
135. a 1 1 A c 2 2 B b T T r 3 9 8 3 5 r L 4 11 5 4 D T d 1 1 5 1 5 5 E 3 6 amp 6 F V f X 7 7 G wig 3 u s m Fl 9 8 IO T 83H X h HI I umu 9 9 1 Y i Am ja FT d m A gt J Z j K b x B KI k br a 17 17 gi esl M b M d IF D k M m Dla gt n O ID 1 1 aF Y O _ o nf m Norwegian ID 865 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 61 00 Epson 1B 52 1B Cyrillic Il ID 866 IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 62 00 Epson 1B 52 15 B 7 Appendix Code pages Greek 869 ID 869 Li 0 1 345678 9 0 0b 0 P p LITI l IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 6500 tolah aas Epson 1B 52 2 2 2 b oo El lx 5 9 S EIU elu 6 amp 6 7 7 G W g w O A M P B v 8 IT 8 H X h x QO E L Y amp 9 1 gt 7 Jlo gt JZ j z 1 HI k iikli s MM 9 1 1
136. a DC1 signal displays 200 ms or 1 second after sufficient ca pacity has been freed that the printer is ready to receive data If it takes longer than 200 ms or 1 second to release the buffer the code DC1 is sent as soon as sufficient capacity is available For both protocols the time period of 200 ms or 1 second can be selected in the menu option Busy Time Connections of the RS 422A Interface In the RS 422A interface the incoming and outgoing signals are con nected to the ports via differential circuits Therefore two lines are re quired for each signal to be transmitted The inverted signals are iden tified with and the non inverted signals are identified with Four lines are required for this connection two for the data sent to the printer and two for the status message sent from the printer to the computer Ready Busy X ON X OFF D 15 Appendix D Interface Data Diagram 1 The polarity of the two lines required for each signal is particularly important A connection with the signal ground between host and printer is not required As it is not possible to list all the different RS 422A interface boards with the different pin assignments and port identifications and for inverted signals or vice versa only example circuits with inverted polarity are listed below The required configuration of the computer is explained in detail If SSD is used as Ready Busy line the polarity of the ports an
137. a fixed pitch or proportional spacing is selected with this command the PROP lamp lights in the CHARACTER PITCH indicator panel on the control panel This command is deleted by selecting a pitch with the commands DC2 ESC ESC g ESC SI ESC P Pn and ESC I Pn If the printer is reset this command is similarly deleted and the step widths for the basic settings apply again 10 34 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Bit image graphics One of the merits of dot matrix printing technology is its flexibility when printing dot patterns Since you can address every dot within the printable area all kinds of graphic objects can be portrayed in the graphics resolution you choose provided by the printer Even the photos in a newspaper when examined closer consist of thou sands of tiny dots The programming of dot patterns is a complex task Even a simple graphic image can contain several hundred dots and designing rea dable characters is frequently associated with trial and error and considerable programming effort For this reason you should use one of the popular application programs for graphics or poster printing which supports one of the emulations available with this printer These programs make possible depending on the comple xity the creation on screen of drawings images or poster type per mit the storing of sketches merging of several images or objects and of course printing out in different
138. acked in accor dance with these instructions could be damaged during transporta tion Any guarantee for dot matrix printers will invalidate if these are not packed as described You will be responsible for cleaning work and repairs in this case Use all of the original packing materi al for transportation 1 Switch off the printer Remove the power cable and interface cable 2 Accessories must be packed separately Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down 3 Remove the ribbon cassette Move the print head to the left end of the platen and se cure the print head with the transport packing material 4 Pack the printer in the pla stic bag supplied Secure the printer in the box using the polystyrene packing materi al 5 Close the box and stick it down Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions This chapter contains the commands for controlling IBM ProPrinter X24 XL24 emulation printer functions The individual commands are listed within the function groups such as print quality page for matting etc The functions of the individual control commands are explained below The commands are listed at the start of each section in deci mal Dec hexadecimal Hex and in ASCII format Print quality Function Dec Hex ASCII Select font 27 107 1B6Bn ESCkn Roman Swiss Courier Presti
139. adian Spanish Swedish II Swedish III Swedish IV Turkey Swiss B C D E G H I J K L M N Q X 4 X 4 c H v v wv wv wv gt Re sa Swiss II 13 7 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions This chapter contains the commands for controlling Epson LQ em ulation printer functions The individual commands are listed within the function groups such as print quality page formatting etc The functions of the individual control commands are explained below The commands are listed at the start of each section in deci mal Dec hexadecimal Hex and in ASCII format Print quality Function Dec Hex ASCII Data processing quality 27 1200 1B 78 00 ESC x NUL Letter quality 27 120 1 1B 78 01 ESC x SOH The printer gives you two different print qualities In data proces sing quality UTL a print speed of 260 characters per second cps is reached printing being bidirectional i e one line from left to right the next line from right to left etc This quality is suitable in particular for extensive lists and drafts Letter quality LQ which reaches a speed of 87 cps should be used to create correspondence or documents With this print quali ty the characters are printed in a high dot pattern resolution This enables the creation of attractive docum
140. al Cut sheet feeder A cut sheet feeder feeds single sheets of paper to the printer thus saving the operator having to feed paper manually sheet by sheet during large print jobs multiple copies of letters etc The printed pages are ejected onto the output tray The cut sheet feeder is available in different versions Narrow sheet feeder with one paper tray Narrow sheet feeder with two paper trays double tray Wide sheet feeder with one paper tray Wide sheet feeder with two paper trays double tray Front paper stand paper eject Rear paper stand paper insert Paper set lever Mounting bracket Chapter 7 Accessories Checking the items supplied Adjusting the length of the feed rail You will need a cross head screwdriver for this Check that the individual items supplied are complete and un damaged You should have re ceived 1 feed rail 1 front paper stand 1to4rear paper stands Remove the packing material Keep the original packing material safe so that you can transport the sheet feeder safely at a later date if necessary The metal paper feed rail enables you to fit a narrow cut sheet feed er onto a wide printer All that is required is to adjust the feed rail to the wide platen 1 Undo and remove the screws on the top of the feed rail 2 Lay the extension piece of the rail next to the appropri ate holes so
141. alid evaluate Invalid ignore 7 Signal Ground SG Signal Ground 8 10 Not assigned 11 Flow Control SSD From printer Indicates that the printer is not ready to receive data 12 17 Not assigned You may set Pin 18 to 18 45V From printer Voltage of 5 Volt 5 V by selecting the menu max 100 mA option Pin 18 19 Not assigned 20 Data Terminal Ready From printer Indicates that printer is ready to receive data 21 25 Not assigned D 6 Appendix D Interface Data MARK Polarity 3to 15V LOW OFF Logical 1 SPACE Polarity 3 to 15V HIGH ON Logical 0 Input circuit Equivalent to SN 75 154 Input Output __ ____ 15V 3V Input ii 15V 300 ns Output circuit Equivalent to SN 75 188 Input Output Transmittef Output 9V 3V 3V 9V 300 ns 300 ns With this protocol the printer uses the voltage level on line RTS 4 SSD 11 or DTR 20 to inform the computer whether it is ready to receive data or whether its buffer is full You can set the Busy line to one of above mentioned lines by selecting Busy Line When the printer is ready to receive data the Busy line DTR or RTS is set to high level Space If you select Busy Line to SSD line SSD is also set to high level Space when the printer is ready to receive data If you select SSD the line is set to low level Mark With this protocol the printer uses the line Transmit Da
142. an ESC J Spanish ESC K Swedish II ESC Swedish III ESC M Swedish IV ESC N Turkish ESC O Swiss I ESC P Swiss II ESC Q Legal Publisher ESC Z 13 1 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets Code Pages Function Dec Hex ASCII Select Code Page 27 91 84 1B5B54 ESC T 5 0 05 00 ENQ NUL 00 00 00 NUL NUL n n 0 00 n n NUL ID Code page 437 USA 1 181 774 Baltic 774 3 6 850 Multilingual 3 82 852 East Europe Latin II 3 84 855 Cyrillic I 855 3 87 857 Turkey 857 3 89 860 Portugal 3 92 863 French Canadian 3 95 865 Norwegian 3 97 866 Cyrillic II 866 3 98 869 Greek 869 3 101 895 Kamenicky MJK 3 127 1008 Greek 437 3 240 1009 Greek 928 3 241 1011 Greek 437 Cyprus 3 243 1012 Turkey 3 244 1014 Polska Mazovia 3 246 1015 ISO Latin 2 3 247 1016 Serbo Croatic I 3 248 1017 Serbo Croatic II 3 249 1018 ECMA 94 3 250 1019 Windows East Europe 3 251 1020 Windows Greek 3 252 1021 Latin 5 Windows Turkey 3 253 1022 Windows Cyrillic 3 254 1024 Hungarian CWI 4 0 1027 Ukrainian 4 3 1029 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 4 5 1030 Hebrew NC 862 4 6 1031 Hebrew OC 4 7 1032 Windows Hebrew 4 8 1034 Windows Baltic 4 10 1072 Bulgarian 4 48 13 2 Chapter 13 IBM Character Sets ASCII Character Set The American Standard Code for Information Interchange is a standarized character set of printable characters bold and control codes The name of the control codes result from their usage in communicati
143. aracter pitch SL ESC SI condensed font ESC W Pn double width font SO ESC SO double width font for one line ESC w Pn ESC US Pn double height font ESC p Pn proportional font the character pitch set in the menu is valid ESC x Pn Hp Lp font defining by character pitch and point size If the printer menu is called the defined basic step size is deleted If the printer is reset by means of hardware software or the control panel the defined basic step size is deleted and the character pitch selected in the menu is valid 14 28 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Setting of page length 27 40 67 1B 28 43 ESC C in basic step sizes Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lp 0 to 255 Hp 0 to 255 MSB ignored This command defines the page length of the currently selected pa per path The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of parame ters following this Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 For this command Hn 0 and Ln 2 must be set With Ln Hn 256 lt 2 this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 2 all Ln Hn 256 data following Lp Hp are ignored The parameters Lp and Hp define the page length in whole multi ples of the current basic step size Hp integer page length in basic step sizes 256 Lp page length in basic step sizes Hp 256 Valid valu
144. art of the next page Top of Form The parameter n designates the number of lines to be skipped to the start of the next page The lower margin actually to be skipped depends on the current line spacing Subsequent changes of line spacing have no effect on the margin to be skipped All line feed commands which place the print position in the area to be skipped cause a jump to the start of the next page 10 14 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions If Skip Over Perforation is set at Yes in the printer menu a bottom area of one inch 2 54 cm is skipped to the next Top of Form The number of lines to be skipped can be selected with the above Skip command The command ESC O switches off the Skip over Perfora tion function The commands for setting page length similarly switch off Skip over Perforation The actual menu setting for the function Skip Over Perforation is selected If page formatting is taken over by the software e g a word processing program you should switch off Skip over Perforation by setting Skip Over Perforation in the print er menu to No If the value for Page Length Control is set to by MENU Setting no skip over perforation is executed with cut sheets Function Dec Hex ASCII Set left and right 27 88 1B 58 ESC X margins n n n n n n n left margin 0 to 254 n right margin 0 to 255 In this command the parameters n and n define the left and right margins The margin values are entered in
145. at the functions of a de vice are imitated for example the printer functions of the IBM ProPrinter In general your dot matrix printer offers additional commands and printer functions apart from the given options which can be made availa ble by selecting the correct printer driver Epson Emulation In the selected emulation the printer imitates the chosen printer type and performs the print commands of an Epson LQ printer 24 needles for example Escape ESC Escape is anon printable control character of the ASCII character set decimal 27 hexadec imal 18 Most print commands are initiated by the Escape character FF See Form Feed Font A font is defined by the combination of dif ferent characteristics such as print quality or character spacing Form Feed FF This printer command terminates one page and outputs it By pressing the FF key a form feed can be performed manually Hexadecimal A term for a digit of the hexadecimal system with a base of 16 The figures 0 to 9 and ad ditionally the letters A to F for the numbers 10 to 15 are used 7 Appendix Index Glossary IBM Emulation In the selected emulation the printer imitates the chosen printer type and can perform the print commands of the IBM ProPrinter for example Impact Printer A printer which transmits the characters to the paper by mechanical strokes See also dot matrix printer Inch One inch is equivalen
146. ately the print position is only logically set at the left margin If Auto LF is set to Yes after each carriage return the printer executes 14 22 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions a line feed command This command deactivates double width printing for one line Function Dec Hex ASCII Backspace 8 08 BS This command sets the print position at the last received printable character it is executed if a printable character or a print command then follows The actual width of a backspace depends on the current pitch When using proportional spacing the backspace command moves the print position for the first character to be overprinted to the left by the proportional width of that character For all following BS commands the print position will be set 1 10 inch to the left If the print position is reset to a superscript character a reverse line feed is executed to the position of the character in question and the next character is printed superscript however the alignment may not be quite exact If the print position is to be reset by several characters a backspace command must be entered for each character to be over printed However the print position cannot be reset beyond the left margin With this command specially composed symbols can be printed which are not available in the character set used Function Dec Hex ASCII Delete buffer 24 18 CAN This command deletes all printable characters in the line bu
147. ation The value for the function Skip Over Perforati on selected as menu item is activated If page formatting is taken over by the software e g a word proces sing program you should switch off Skip over Perforation by set ting Skip over Perforation in the printer menu to No Function Dec Hex ASCII Set left margin 27 108 1B6Cn ESC In n 0 to 255 Set right margin 2781n 1B51n ESC On n 1to 255 In these commands the parameter n defines the left and right mar gins The margin values are entered in character columns The mar gin positions depend on the actual current pitch Once the margins are set the positions are retained even after changing the pitch pro vided the margins have not been expressly reset absolute positi on Note that the value for the right margin must be at least 1 inch lar ger than the left margin by the number of character columns given in the table The right margin must not exceed the maximum values given below 14 16 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Pitch Narrow printer Wide printer leftn rightn leftn 10 cpi proportional 0 70 10 80 0 126 10 136 12 cpi 0 84 12 96 0 151 12 163 15 cpi 0 105 15 120 0 189 15 204 17 1 cpi 0 119 18 137 0 215 18 233 20 cpi proportional 0 140 20 160 0 252 20 255 Line spacing Function Dec Hex ASCII Variable line spacing 1 8 inch line spacing 27 48 1B30 ESC 0 Set 1 6 inch line 27 50 1B32 ESC2 spacing Set va
148. by hardware software or the control panel The printer menu is activated 14 43 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Print quality Data processing quality 27 1200 1B 78 00 ESC x NUL Letter quality 27 1201 1B 78 01 ESC x SOH Select font 27 107 1B 6 ESC kn Function Dez Hex ASCII Print modes Start 10 cpi 18 12 ESC P Start 12 cpi 27 58 1B3A ESCM Start 15 cpi 27 103 1B 67 ESC g Start condensed printing 15 OF SI or 27 15 1B OF ESC SI Stop condensed printing 18 12 DC2 Start double width 27 87 49 1B 57 31 ESC W 1 Stop double width 27 87 48 1B 57 30 ESC W 0 Start double width 14 OE SO for one line or 27 14 1B OE ESC SO Stop double width 20 14 DC4 before end of line Start double height 27 11949 1B7731 ESC w 1 or 27 31 49 1B 1 31 ESC US 1 Stop double height 27 11948 1B7730 ESC w 0 or 27 31 48 1F 30 ESC US 0 Start proportional spacing 27 11249 1 70 31 ESC p 1 Stop proportional spacing 2711248 1B 7030 ESC p 0 16 1 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Print mode Print attributes Function Dez Hex ASCII Set character spacing 2732n 1B 20n ESC SP n Standard character spacing 27 320 1B 20 00 ESC SP NUL Function Dez Hex ASCII Start emphasized 27 69 1B 45 ESC E Stop emphasized 27 70 1B 46 ESC F Start enhanced 2771 1B 47 ESC G Stop enhanced 27 72 1B 48 ESCH Start underline 27 45 49 1B2D31 ESC 1 St
149. cards installation 7 28 Interface data D 1 Interference filter 1 1 1 9 ITEM 4 2 F 2 Appendix Index Glossary L P Labels on continuous paper E 6 test D 5 Labels on single sheet E 5 timing D 4 Legal note PARK 2 6 LF 2 6 Platen 2 2 Location 1 2 Platen knob 1 1 2 1 LQ 2 7 Possible faults 8 1 POWER 2 4 M Power cable 1 1 1 10 Power socket 2 3 Machine readable fonts XVIII Power supply 1 2 Maintenance XVI Power switch 1 10 2 3 Major faults 8 6 PRESTIGE 2 7 MENU 2 4 4 1 Print areas E 1 Menu mode 4 1 Print characteristics A 1 Menu settings 4 1 Print functions 2 7 Micro Feed Down Up 2 5 Print head 2 2 Mounting bracket cut sheet feeder 7 11 Print head lever 3 2 Print menu settings 4 1 N Print position bar codes C 20 PRINT QUALITY 2 7 Noise level A 4 Printer Control 4 9 Notes on paper types 3 1 Printer components 2 1 cover 2 1 0 drivers 1 11 5 1 OFF LINE 2 5 menu settings 4 1 ON LINE 2 5 assembling 1 1 1 2 Operator panel 2 1 2 4 dimensions A 4 Options A 5 setting up 1 1 1 3 Overview default menu items 4 4 unpacking 1 1 Printing a 24 pin bar code C 8 P Printing under DOS 5 3 5 5 2 7 Packing the printer for transportation 9 1 Pull tractor feed Paper general 7 12 feed specifications 2 3 installation 7 13 feed continuous paper 3 8 paper feed 7 15 feed cut sheets 3 7 removing tractor feed 7 17 formats E 1 sprocket paper feed 7 16
150. character columns The margin positions depend on the actual current pitch Once the mar gins are set the positions are retained even after changing the pitch provided the margins have not been expressly reset absolute posi tion If you only want to change one margin position just enter the value 0 for the margin not to be changed Note that the value for the right margin must be larger than the left margin by the number of character columns given in the table The right margin must not exceed the maximum values given below see table below Pitch Narrow printer Wide printer left n right n leftn right n 10 cpi proportional 0 70 10 80 0 126 10 136 12 cpi 0 84 12 96 0 151 12 163 15 cpi 0 105 15 120 0 189 15 204 17 1 cpi 0 119 18 137 0 215 18 233 20 cpi proportional 0 140 20 160 0 252 20 255 Set margins Margins should always be set at the start of a line 10 15 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Variable line spacing Usual line spacings for text are 6 or 8 lines per inch Ipi Function Dec Hex ASCII Set top and bottom 27 91 83 1B 5B 53 ESC 5 margin 40 04 00 EOT NUL mi m p p M m P P mM m P p In this command the parameters m and m define the top margin distance from the top of form to the top edge of the first line The unit is n 1440 inch Calculate the values for m and m according to the following formula m integer value top margin in 1 1400 inch increments 256 m
151. cters let ters figures special characters are available Character Spacing Fonts with set character spacing and propor tional fonts are distinguished Colour Ribbon The colour ribbon is a continuous strip of inked fabric which is re inked within the car tridge By the stroke of the needle the ink is transmitted to the paper See also dot ma trix printer Compatibility Compatibility is the harmony of different systems with each other Compatible sys tems ensure an easy exchange of programs or devices without major modifications Continuous Paper For the printing of lists labels or duplicates mostly continuous paper is used which is taken from the stack folded in Z shape Continuous paper is transported via the spikes of the transportation unit which locks into the lateral holes of the paper Control Characters These non printable characters of the ASCII character set activate functions such as form feed line feed or carriage return The com mand Escape activates command sequenc es Escape commands cpi characters per inch The pitch for non proportional fonts is stated in characters per inch cps characters per second The printing speed is measured in characters per second CR See Carriage Return CSF See Cut Sheet Feeder Cut Sheet Cut sheets are fed between the platen and different transport rollers Cut Sheet Feeder CSF By means of a cut sheet feeder the printer ca
152. d can be selected in the printer menu where SSD is the polarity of the ports TR and RS see dia gram 2 If the ports 550 and SSD are reversed you have to select the option SSD If the printer prints data which is in no way similar to the data sent by the host the polarity of the ports RD and RD may be reversed The wiring of the dual serial interface board HP 24541B with the RS 422A interface of the printer is described as a circuit example With this interface board the mode RS 232C or RS 422A can be used For further information about the configuration of this board see the manual of the board Protocol Ready Busy Ready Busy Line printer TR Host Printer Menu Settings SD Serial I F Option Protocol Ready SD SSD 21 Busy Line DTR DEA DSRSignal Invalid RD SD 22 RS RD 6 RS RD 24 CS RS 7 CS RS 25 GND CS 9 CS 27 DM 11 DM 29 TR 12 TR 30 GND 19 LA VN AM AN Appendix D Interface Data Protocol Ready Busy Diagram 2 Ready Busy Line printer 550 Host Printer Menu Settings SD SSD 3 lt Serial I F Option Protocol Ready Busy L SD SSD 21 Busy Line 550 e DSRSignal Invalid RD SD 22 RS RDe 6 P RS RD 24 CS RS 7 Cs RS 25 d GND CS 9 as B ce m gt DM 29 TRE 4 TR 30 GND 19
153. d in the printer and retained even after the printer is switched off These settings can be changed by software commands from your application or by means of the operator panel After switching the printer on or off the values set in the menu come into force again Changes to the printer menu are also retained if the mains power supply is disconnected from the printer The printer menu is structured as follows at the top level the func tions are divided into so called menu groups GROUP Within each group are to be found several menu items ITEM To each menu item in turn can be assigned a menu value SET In order to change the value of a menu item you must first call Activate menu menu mode To do this hold down the SHIFT button and press the mode MENU button while the printer is in ON LINE mode The menu There must be paper in the mode can also be activated by holding down the MENU button Printer when switching on the printer This second option is still open to you when the operator panel is blocked by means of the Operator Panel Function The menu mode is activated when the indicator lamp MENU is lit The functions beneath the buttons are then activated Should you wish to print out the current menu settings insert Print menu settings sheet of paper in the printer and press the PRINT button The menu will be printed out in data processing quality If in menu mode the printing reaches the end of the paper insert a ne
154. different characters sets can be assigned to the command ESC t Pn Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 14 41 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function For this command Hn 0 and Ln 3 must be set With Ln Hn 256 lt 3 this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 3 all Ln Hn 256 3 data following Lp Hp are ignored The parameters Pn and Pn determine the code pages which are to be assigned to the parameter Pn The following values are permis sible Pn 00H 01H 02H 03H 30H 31H 32H 33H Pn 00H 01H 03H 07H 08H 09H Pn 00H The assignment of the parameters Pn and Pn to the selectable code pages is listed in the following table Pn Pn Code page 2 3 italic character set PC437 USA PC850 Multilingual PC860 Portugal PC863 Canadian French PC865 Norwegian Oo ON WO c If invalid values are assigned to the parameters Pn Pn and Pn the previous assignment remains valid To each valid value of Pn can be assigned one of the code pages listed in the above table The selection of the code pages assigned to parameter Pn is performed with the command ESC t Pn where by the parameters Pn and Pn must correspond In the initial setting after switching on or resetting the printer the following assignments are valid 14 42 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Assignment Pn Code page 0 00H 30H i
155. dix D Interface Data Centronics Blocked Duplex CBD Protocol Block format STX Data ETX Data outside a block is ignored Error Detection A block was transmitted correctly after having received an ETX signal an ACK signal is transmitted to the sender confirming that the data was received without any errors A block was transmitted incorrectly after having received an ETX signal a NAK signal is transmitted to the sender indicating that an error occured during the transmission On receipt of the NAK sig nal the block has to be transmitted again Display of Busy Status None If no error was detected Data Receive PS Data Block 1 PS 2 25 Buffer D gt D o LLI 90 Data Send Q Buffer B gt B lt lt If an error was detected Data Receive Data Block 1 banesa lt Data Block 1 PS Buffer D gt D o wn Data Send lt Buffer gt z z Data for Bitmap Graphics The above mentioned timing diagrams are only valid as long as the printer is in text mode The start character STX and the stop charac ter ETX are only interpreted as control characters of the CBD trans mission protocol in text mode Please note the following if you want to print bitmap graphics D 28 Appendix D Interface Data Maximum length of block 0 to 1 KByte 8 KByte The maximum
156. djust the printer so that you do not print 6 35 mm to the left and right of the perforation b Avoid holes at the intersection of vertical and horizontal perfo ration E 3 Appendix Paper formats and print areas Further information _ The transportation holes must be exactly round and precisely punched The rim may be toothed The paper must be folded alternately along the horizontal perfo ration Do not use paper lying in loops because problems with the paper feed may occur Also avoid waves and wrinkles mainly occurring with the first and last sheets of a new paper stack Do not use these sheets Ifthe continuous paper is separated along the horizontal perfo ration the separation rim must be straight i e separation rims and corners must not be wavy or wrinkled Cut sheets The standard paper format is DIN A4 210 x 297 mm Other paper formats DIN A5 DIN B5 etc can also be used 88 9 to 216 mm 88 9 to 363 mm b 76 to 420 mm printable length d printable width e min 6 35 mm f min 4 35 mm g 6 35 to 28 6 mm h min 6 35 mm Format The paper width a is between 88 9 and 216 mm small printer and between 88 9 and 363 mm large printer The paper length b is 76 to 420 mm The measurements for the non printable area g h are between 6 35 and 28 6 mm For paper with a width of 304 8 mm the size must be between 19 05 and 28 6 mm
157. ds can be achieved The feed forwards takes place to no further than the next top of page position backwards no further than the top of page po sition of the current page If print areas are set backwards feed takes place no further than the top margin of the print area A feed into the bottom non printable area even due to a set perforation skip causes a paper feed to the next top of page position If this command requires a backwards feed of the paper it is igno red if the current line contains raster graphic commands The following table states the maximum values depending on the basic step size in inches Step size 1 360 1 80 1 120 1 90 1 72 1 60 Range 16639 8318 5546 4159 3327 2773 Absolute position step size Lp Hp 256 Function Dec Hex ASCII Relative vertical print 2740118 1B2876 ESC positioning in units of Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn the basic step size Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lp 0 to 255 Hp 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command the printing position is adjusted relatively in the vertical direction to the current print position in multiples of the current basic step size The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of parameters follo wing this 14 32 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 For this command Hn 0 and Ln 2 must be set With Ln Hn 256 lt 2
158. e garded as one character a 8 8 characters D EAN13 13 characters lt UPC A 12 characters d 6 characters e Code 39 maximum of 50 characters f Interleaved 2 5 maximum of 50 characters 2 Code 128 Set A B C maximum of 50 characters If the Code 128 is selected is regarded as one character The value for P cannot be changed for bar code types listed under a to d For the bar code types listed under e through to f you can select any value listed under number 6 If P is larger than the above mentioned numbers the command will be ignored 7 The following characters are valid data for printing 8 0 30H to 9 39H D EANI3 0 30H to 9 39H c UPC A 0 30H to 9 39H d UPC E 0 30H to 9 39H e Code 39 SP 20H to Z 5AH 43 characters see Table 5 f Interleaved 2 5 0 30H to 9 39H g Code 128 Set A 00H to 66H h Code 128 Set B 19H to 7FH i Code 128 Set C 30H to 3CH for characters of Code 128 see Table 6 Only the above mentioned data and checksum code is valid 8 A checksum is generated automatically by sending a checksum code at the end of the bar code data Appendix Bar codes 9 The checksum code is as follows 8 40H D EAN13 40H UPC A 40 d UPC E not possible e Code 39 40H f Interleaved 2 5 40H g Code 128 SetA g 67H h Code 128 SetB CAN 18H i C
159. e corresponding value from the table of national char acter sets for the parameter n n Character set Code Page 0 ASCII 1 French 2 German 3 British 4 Danish I 5 Swedish I 6 Italian 7 Spanish I 8 Japanese 9 Norwegian 10 Danish II 11 Spanish II 12 Latin American 13 French Canadian 14 Dutch 15 Swedish II 16 Swedish III 17 Swedish IV 18 Turkish 19 Swiss I 20 Swiss II 22 Polish Mazovia 23 ISO Latin 2 24 Serbocroat I 25 Serbocroat II 26 Multilingual 850 27 Norwegian 865 28 Portugal 860 29 Turkish 38 Greek 437 14 21 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function n Character set Code Page 39 Greek 928 41 Greek 437 Cyprus 42 ECMA 94 43 French Canadian 44 Cyrillic I 855 45 Cyrillic II 866 46 East Europe Latin II 852 47 Greek 869 49 Windows East Europe 50 Windows Greek 51 Latin 5 Windows Turkish 52 Windows Cyrillic 54 Hungarian CWI 55 Kamenicky MJK 57 Turkish 857 60 Hebrew NC 862 61 Hebrew OC 62 Windows Hebrew 64 Legal Publisher 66 Ukrainian 67 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 68 Windows Baltic 72 Bulgarian 74 Baltic 774 Chapter 17 and Appendix B give you an overview of Code Pages and character sets Other commands 221 Carriage return Function Dec Hex ASCII Carriage return 13 0D CR If this command is entered the printer prints all data in the line buffer and sets the next print position at the left margin For short line seeking the print head does not make these movements imme di
160. e front of the printer The mounting hooks of the tractor must click audibly into place Place the printer back onto its support feet Switch the printer on 7 21 Chapter 7 Accessories Feeding continuous paper 1 Move the paper lever on the right of the printer back to the continuous paper posi tion REAR The symbol on the cover for cut sheet han dling TOP shows you the correct lever position A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted Open the cover of the left Place a stack of continuous paper underneath the printer or feed the continuous paper from below through the feed slot of a printer table hand sprocket feed place the continuous paper onto the first two sprocket pins and close the cover again 7 22 Chapter 7 Accessories To adjust the left sprocket feed to suit the width of the paper release the locking le ver pull forwards Move the feed unit to the required position and lock it with the lever again Now adjust the right hand sprocket feed in the same way to suit the paper width Open the cover of the right sprocket drive place the continuous paper onto the first two sprocket pins and close the cover again Lock the feed again with the lever Make sure the paper is slightly tensioned Fold the
161. e of the control codes result from their usage in communication and data transmission Some characters are used to activate printer functions as shown in the corresponding chapters The entering of control codes may vary from program to program ASCII Dez Hex Ctrl ASCII Dez Hex ASCII Dez Hex ASCII Dez Hex NUL 0 00 5 32 20 64 40 96 60 SOH 1 01 A 33 21 A 65 41 97 61 STX 2 02 AB 34 22 66 42 b 98 62 ETX 3 03 AC 35 23 67 43 c 99 63 4 04 D 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ENQ 5 05 AE 37 25 69 45 101 65 6 06 amp 38 26 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 G 39 27 71 47 5 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 72 48 h 104 68 9 09 AT 41 29 I 73 49 1 105 69 LF 10 0A J 42 2A J 74 j 106 VT 11 OB K 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 0C AL 7 44 2 L 76 4 1 108 6 13 OD AM 45 2D M 77 4D 109 6D 50 14 OE AN 46 2E N 78 AE n 110 6E SI 15 OF O 47 2 79 o 111 6F DLE 16 10 P 0 48 30 80 50 p 112 70 DC1 17 Q 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 R 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 DC3 19 13 75 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73 DC4 20 14 AT 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 21 15 U 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 5 22 16 6 54 36 86 56 v 118 76 ETB 23 17 W 7 55 37 87 57 119 77 24 18 X 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78 EM 25 19 Y 9 57 39 89 59 121 79 SUB 26 77 58 Z 90 5 7 122 7 5 27 1B 4 i 59 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C 60 3C N 92 5C 124 7
162. e print er Finally fully remove the separator Fitting the paper 1 When you wish to refit separator the separator fit the catches on both sides of the separator onto the platen axle 2 Now press the separator downwards until the you hear the catches snap into place on both sides Platen axle Catches Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Connecting the printer to the computer It is important to read the safety instructions on the first pages of this manual Before you can use the printer you have to connect it to your computer and to the power supply Your printer is supplied with a parallel Centronics interface as standard A serial interface can be installed as an additional facility This is described in Chapter 7 data on interfacing can be found in Appendix D Some printer models have an interference filter supplied with Fitting the inter them This square cable sleeve suppresses undesirable electro ference filter magnetic interference from other electrical sources by means of its cable sleeve ferrite core 1 Open the cable sleeve of the filter and fit it on the inter face cable close to the con nector at the printer end 2 Snap the sleeve shut to close it the cable now has interfer ence suppression Note The parallel and serial interface cables must not be installed or used at the same time as this may cause malfunctions Chap
163. e spacing variable The newly se lected line spacing only becomes valid when it is activated by the command ESC 2 If ESC 2 is sent without the line spacing having been changed by the preceding command ESC the printer resets the line spacing to the value which was selected in the menu under Line Spacing Alternate Graphics Mode AGM This mode can be activated in the menu mode AGM contains com mands compatible with the Epson LQ printer series that are limited to Graphic and Line feed commands The commands available in AGM are marked If the Alternate Graphics Mode is selected in the menu ESC A n line spacing steps will change to n 60 inch and the ESC 3 n to n 180 inch 10 17 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Line feed Paper feed Function Dec Hex ASCII Line feed 10 0A LF Reverse line feed 27 93 1B 5D ESC Variable line feed 27 74 1B4An ESCJn n 216 inch n 0 to 255 Variable line feed 27 74 1B4An ESC Jn n 180 inch AGM n 0 to 255 Variable line feed 27 3752n 1B2534n ESC 4n n 360 inch n 0 to 255 Set line spacing units 2791924 1B5B5C 04 ESC N EOT 0 m m 00 m m NUL m m A line feed LF command causes the printer to print the data in the line buffer and then to move the print position down by the selected line spacing If in the printer menu Auto CR is set at Yes a carriage return is executed and the print position is set the the left margin With a variable
164. e tear off position Do not forward paper to the tear off position by using the platen knob With the Form Tear Off function activated you can check and set the top of form by pressing the TEAR button in OFF LINE mode the paper is drawn back to the top of form Reset the top of form by pressing the Micro Feed Up Down buttons with the SHIFT button pressed The paper is transported to the tear off position after mak ing this setting Should you wish to change the setting of the tear off position switch the printer OFF LINE with the Form Tear Off function acti vated Make sure the paper is at the tear off position Change the tear off position by pressing the Micro Feed Up Down buttons with the SHIFT button pressed When using graphics programmes there may due to the amount of processing to be performed by the computer be pauses in the send ing of data which cause the paper to be fed to the tear off position The unnecessary transporting of the paper can impair accurate registration of the graphics In this situation switch off the Form Tear Off function Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Chapter 4 Printer menu settings The printer menu The printer menu is used to adjust your printer to suit the applica tion Thus you can use the printer menu to choose the emulation You can adjust the page length for continuous paper or cut sheets change the font and make other settings The changes made in the menu are store
165. ed character pitch or proportio nal font is selected the lamp PROP lights on the control panel in the display field CHARACTER PITCH 14 40 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions This command is deleted when selecting a character pitch by means of the commands ESC P ESC M ESC g ESC p Pn and ESC Pn If the printer is reset this command is deleted and the step sizes for the initial setting become valid again Character sets and code pages Function Dec Hex ASCII Print characters from the fully printa Print several characters 27 40 94 1B 28 5E ESC ble character set from the fully printable Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn character set Data Data Data Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command all characters from the range decimal 1 to 255 of a code page are addressed as printable characters The address 0 is treated as ASCII NUL code The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of characters to be printed Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 If the parameters Ln and Hn 0 are set this command is ignored This command is effective for all selectable code pages Function Dec Hex ASCII Assign new code page Assign new code page 2740116 1B2874 ESC t Ln Hn Ln Hn Ln Hn Pn Pn Pn PnPn Pn Pn Pn Pn Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command four
166. ed in seven steps Code 39 and Interleaved 2 5 type bar codes the black and or the white area can be enlarged in seven steps by two parameters However it is recommended that both areas be enlarged by the same value Positioning When designing a bar code ensure that the character position of the bar code is absolute in order to avoid rounding and positioning er rors Appendix Bar codes Selection of Type and Size of Bar Code Function Dec Hex ASCII Selecting the bar code Select bar code 27 16 65 1B 10 41 ESC DLE A Pa n e n pnr pora Use this command to select the type and the size of the bar codes Explanation of parameters 1 p is the amount of data following p MSB is ignored The com mand is invalid when the value 0 1 or 3 is assigned to p Valid values for p are 2 4 5 6 7 and 8 If p is equal to or greater than 9 all data after n will be ignored 2 n and n select the type of bar code high order half byte is ig nored n n Bar Code Type 0 1 EANS8 0 2 EAN13 1 0 UPC A 1 4 UPC E 2 0 Code 39 3 0 Interleaved 2 5 4 0 Code 128 Only the above listed parameters for n n are valid The command will be ignored when other data is transmitted 3 n and n determine the vertical length of the bar code The length is determined by the following formula n 10 n 15 180 inch If n and n are assigned the value 0 the current length will be used If n 10 n gt 25 the length w
167. ed procedures should only be carried out by trained technicians referring to the technical documentation circuit diagrams etc of the printer interface and the computer interface D 33 Appendix D Interface Data Examples Diagram 15 Diagram 16 This connection is equivalent to circuit diagram 10 Connection 2 wire Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop None IBM Asynchronous Printer Assignment of Adapter Short Circuit Jumper SP4 tp B jl D 9 D 9 D n D 10 qe K SP1 es Centronics Blocked Duplex as AB SP5 alee SP2 B SP 2755526 PE B 25 B 18 gt spa B 18 B 19 SP5 GND 7 gt GND7 Connection 4 wire Power source receive loop Host Power source send loop Printer IBM Asynchronous Printer Assignment of Adapter Short Circuit Jumper gt SP1 Ready Busy XON XOFF SP1 Centronics Blocked Duplex 4 D 9 gt D 9 1 D 11 D 10 IN SP3 B 18 SP4 18 lt B 19 99 9 25 GND 7 D 34 Appendix D Interface Data Connection 3 wire Power source receive loop Printer Power source send loop Printer IBM Asynchronous Adapter Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper 5 4 D 11 D 10 A B E D D 9 E 18
168. ed to the printer by plugging the power cable into the power socket The printer is switched on or off by means of the power switch The paper feed is adjusted by means of the paper lever Rear view 2 3 Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer The operator panel The operator panel allows you to control the printer and change settings The indicator lamps show the current status of the printer The meaning and function of the buttons depends on the current operating mode of the printer The indicator lamps POWER ALARM POWER The printer is switched on ALARM An error is present which is preventing normal printing operation paper jam end of paper SEL The printer is ready ON LINE to receive data from the com puter If this lamp is not lit the printer is in OFF LINE mode and not ready to receive data If the lamp is blinking the printer is in print suppress mode and is ignoring all data sent to it until this mode is cancelled MENU The menu mode is activated In this mode you can alter printer settings as you wish and permanently store these settings The menu mode is described in detail in Chapter 4 The MENU lamp blinks if the temperature control mechanism has reduced the printing speed in order to prevent overheating of the print head 2 4 Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer The buttons Micro Feed Down The paper is transported backwards in steps of 1 180 inch downwards Simu
169. ee ways of accessing the information in this manual You can read the text in the order in which the manual is arranged Youcan find the passages you are looking for under the head ings below or the table of contents The index in appendix F will guide you to the passages in the manual relating to specific printer terms and messages Assembling Setting Up Programming Chapter 1 2 Chapter 10 17 Daily Printer Operation Technical Data Chapter 3 6 Appendix A D Accessories Paper Formats Chapter 7 Appendix E Troubleshooting Short Reference Chapter 8 Appendix H IV Operation G gt Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Assembling and setting up the printer A guided tour of the printer Paper handling Printer menu settings Printer control Consumables and cleaning Accessories Troubleshooting Packing the printer for transportation IBM Standard functions IBM Graphics IBM Control code tables IBM Characters sets Epson Standard functions Epson Graphics Epson Control code tables Epson Characters sets en N lt VI Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Tech
170. eed group Remove the tractor feed from the switched off printer by repeating Removing the the installation steps in the reverse order The paper feed rail must tractor feed also be removed Now refit the paper separator and paper support as described in Chapter 1 7 17 Chapter 7 Accessories Checking the items supplied Fitting the bottom tractor feet The bottom tractor feed The bottom tractor feed gives you an additional means of feeding continuous paper from beneath the printer For this purpose the printer is raised up on the two feet supplied with the feeder Check that the individual items supplied are complete and un damaged You should have re ceived depending on the mo del lbottom tractor feed J narrow or wide 2tractor feed feet Remove the packing material Keep the original packing material safe so that you can transport the tractor feed safely at a later date if necessary Before the tractor feed can be installed the support feet for the trac tor feed must be fitted A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down 7 18 Chapter 7 Accessories Switch off the printer Inorder to fit the feet set the printer on its left side with
171. eeder the value must be set to Wide If you are using a narrow cut sheet feeder with a wide printer set the value to Narrow I Prime the signal on the I Prime line of the parallel interface can either be ignored Invalid cause printing out of the current buffer Buffer Print or erase the print buffer Buffer Clear Pin 18 pin 18 of the parallel interface can be switched to 5 volts or open if required Auto Feed XT In essence no line feed LF is performed after a car riage return CR if Auto LF is set to No If however in Epson mode Auto LF is set to No and Auto Feed XT to Valid a line feed is per formed when an external Auto Feed Signal Centronics pin 14 is issued This special case can be necessary for certain combinations of hardware and software In the case of serial data transmission the data bits of a byte are sent one after the other via a line to the printer For correct transmission it may be necessary to change the interface settings so that they match the settings of your computer If there is a serial interface installed and this has been activated in the menu the menu items described below appear Parity Selects the parity For each byte of data a start bit with logi cal value 1 is transmitted followed by the 7 or 8 bits of data accord ing to the data length defined If required a parity bit can follow for the purpose of data checking Serial data 7 8 bits Defines the data format It is necessary to
172. eft to 0 25 mm to the right Value Shift 0 25 mm Right 0 25 mm to the right 0 20 mm Right 0 20 mm to the right 0 15 mm Right 0 15 mm to the right 0 10 mm Right 0 10 mm to the right 0 05 mm Right 0 05 mm to the right 0 no shift 0 05 mm Left 0 05 mm to the left 0 10 mm Left 0 10 mm to the left 0 15 mm Left 0 15 mm to the left 0 20 mm Left 0 20 mm to the left 0 25 mm Left 0 25 mm to the left 11 14 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Print quality Select font 27 107 1B6Bn ESCkn or 27 91 73 185849 50 05 00 ENQ NUL m p mi m p p P p r r Function Dez Hex ASCII Print modes Start 10 cpi 18 12 DC2 Start 12 cpi 27 58 1B ESC Start 15 cpi 27103 1B 67 ESC g Start 17 1 cpi 15 OF SI Start 20 cpi 27 15 1B OF ESC SI Start double width 27 87 49 1B 57 31 ESC W 1 Stop double width 27 87 48 1B 57 30 ESC W 0 Start double width 14 OE SO for one line or 27 14 1B 0E ESC SO Stop double width 20 14 DC4 before end of line Start proportional spacing 27 80 49 1B 50 31 ESC P 1 Stop proportional spacing 27 80 48 1B 50 30 ESC 12 1 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Print attributes Multifunction commands Function Dez Hex ASCII Start emphasized 27 69 1B 45 ESC printing Stop emphasized 27 70 1B 46 ESC printing Start enhanced 2771 1B 47 ESC printing Stop enhanced 2772 1B 48 ESC
173. endix Code pages Appendix B Code pages This chapter contains the code pages available in IBM and Epson emulation exceptions are marked How to select a code page is described in Chapter 10 and 14 ID Code pages page 437 USA B 3 774 Baltic 774 B 3 850 Multilingual B 4 852 East Europe Latin 2 B 4 855 Cyrillic I B 5 857 Turkish 857 B 5 860 Portugese B 6 863 French Canadian B 6 865 Norwegian B 7 866 Cyrillic II B 7 869 Greek 869 B 8 895 Kamenicky MJK B 8 1008 Greek 437 B 9 1009 Greek 928 B 9 1011 Greek 437 Cyprus B 10 1012 Turkish B 10 1014 Polska Mazovia B 11 1015 ISO Latin 2 B 11 1016 Serbo Croatic I B 12 1017 Serbo Croatic II B 12 1018 ECMA 94 B 13 1019 Windows East Europe B 13 1020 Windows Greek B 14 1021 Latin 5 Windows Turkish B 14 1022 Windows Cyrillic B 15 1024 Hungarian CWI B 15 1027 Ukrainian B 16 1029 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 B 16 1030 Hebrew NC 862 B 17 1031 Hebrew OC B 17 1032 Windows Hebrew B 18 1034 Windows Baltic B 18 1072 Bulgarian B 19 Appendix Code pages Conversion table The layout of this conversion table corresponds to the following character set tables The row and the column headers show the hexadecimal value of the characters The table contains dec imal and octal values Example hexadecimal 23 column 2 row 3 is equal to decimal 35 Appendix Code page
174. ends on the current pitch When using proportional spacing the backspace command moves the print position 1 10 inch to the left If the print position is reset to a superscript character a reverse line feed is executed to the posi tion of the character in question and the next character is printed superscript however the alignment may not be quite exact If the print position is to be reset by several characters a backspace command must be entered for each character to be overprinted 10 26 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions However the print position cannot be reset beyond the left margin With this command specially composed symbols which are not available in the character set used can be printed Function Dec Hex ASCII Delete buffer Delete buffer 24 18 CAN This command deletes all printable characters in the line buffer Functions set by commands are not reset nor is the receive buffer deleted Function Dec Hex ASCII Automatic line feed Activate automatic 27 53 49 1B 35 31 ESC 51 line feed Deactivate automatic 27 53 48 1B 35 30 ESC 50 line feed If automatic line feed is activated the printer also executes a line feed when a carriage return command is received This function can also be controlled via the menu item Auto LF Function Dec Hex ASCII Unidirectional printing Start unidirectional 27 85 49 1B 55 31 ESC U1 printing Stop unidirectional 27 85 40 1B 55 30 ESC U0 printing To op
175. ent to Am 26LS32 Circuits Input I Output Input Differentiating Input V 6 V 200 mV Y 4 v Maximum Operating 200 mV Range 6V Threshold Level Output Circuit equivalent to Am 26LS31 Output Input V Output p c 32V V Outpu 0 32 V 0v 32V Output V 0 32 V 0v D 13 Appendix D Interface Data Menu options for the serial interfaces RS 232C RS 422A Option Action Parity Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits Protocol Diagnostic Test Busy Line Baud Rate DSR Signal DTR Signal Busy Time Is odd or even parity used odd parity select Odd even parity select Even no parity select None Is the data format used 7 bit or 8 bit 7 bit format select 7 Bits 8 bit format select 8 Bits Which protocol is used Ready Busy Protocol select Ready Busy X ON X OFF Protocol select X ON X OFF Do you want to perform an I F test Yes select Yes Normal printing select No Via which line is a Busy signal received SSD 9 V select SSD SSD 9 V select SSD 9 select RTS 9 select RTS Which baud rate Bit s BPS is used 19 2000 Baud select 19200 BPS 9 600 Baud select 9600 BPS 4 800 Baud select 4800 BPS 2 400 Baud select 2400 BPS 1 200 Baud select 1200 BPS 600 Baud select 600 BPS 300 Baud select 300 BPS Does your system send a DSR signal to the
176. ents when using a word processor These print qualities can be selected via the menu item Print Mode or the control panel Print quality 14 1 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Select font The OCR B consists of the 14 characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 gt lt All other characters are shown in Courier Character pitch Function Dec Hex ASCII Select font 27 107 1B6Bn ESC kn Roman Swiss Courier Prestige OCR B Orator Swiss Bold Gothic typeface according to menu NN N This command allows you to select a font Courier is the most usual standard font while Gothic gives your documents an at tractive appearance If you need a machine readable font for special applications then select OCR B You can also use the menu mode or the PRINT QUALITY button on the printer s control panel to select a typeface Print modes Function Dec Hex ASCII Start 10 cpi 27 80 1B 50 ESC P Start 12 cpi 27 77 1B 4D ESC M Start 15 cpi 27 103 1B 67 ESC g The pitch is usually measured in characters per inch cpi For ex ample with 10 cpi 10 characters can be printed per inch 2 54 cm Each character then occupies 1 10 of an inch The pitch can also be defined via the Pitch menu item or via the control panel The spacing can also be defined via a multifunction command 14 2 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Function Dec Hex A
177. erface Data It is not possible to give a definitive statement about the connec tions on computer side If problems occur using the X ON X OFF protocol refer to the circuit below Please note that it is assumed that signal DTR is set to SPACE on the computer Computes Printer PC industry standard Protective 1 1 Protective 25 pin to 25 pin Ground Ground TD 2 2 TD Ensure that the printer menu option DSR is set to Invalid RD 3 3 RD RTS 4 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DSR 6 6 DSR DCD 8 8 DCD DTR 20 20 DTR Signal Ground 7 7 Signal Ground Print Computer 2215 industry standard Protective 1 Protective 9 pin to 25 pin Ground Ground RD 2 2 Ensure that the printer menu option DSR is set to Invalid TD 3 3 RD CTS 8 4 RTS RTS 7 5 CTS DSR 6 6 DSR DCD 1 lt 8 DCD DTR 4 20 DTR Signal Ground 5 7 Signal Ground Appendix D Interface Data Interface test If the menu option Diagnostic Test is set to Yes and the test plug described below is con nected to the serial interface a test of the serial interface is au tomatically carried out when the printer is turned on The re sult of the test will be printed This process is repeated until the printer is switched off The printer will return to normal operation when you set the menu option Diagnostic Test to No 1 Canon DB 25S or equivalent plug RS 232C If everything is working properly y
178. es for the basic step size are 1 360 1 180 1 120 1 90 1 72 and 1 60 inch page lengths in the range 1 360 inch to 22 inches are valid If in this command values of Lp Hp 0 or Lp Hp 256 gt 22 inches are used this command is ignored and the previously set page length is retained This command is immediately valid in the current print line and the current print position becomes the top of page position Where sin gle cut sheets are being fed the current print position does not be come the top of page position if the menu item Page Length Con trol is set to the value by Menu Setting This command resets the perforation skip and the top and bottom non printable margins A previously selected top non printable area is however taken into account from the next page on unless the top and bottom non printable areas are re defined immediately after this command Set page length in basic step sizes 14 29 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Horizontal and vertical basic step size A set up vertical format unit and set vertical tabs are not reset by this command A defined page length is not affected if the basic step size is chan ged later on If the printer is reset the page length in the initial setting becomes valid again Function Dec Hex ASCII Setting of horizontal 27 40 85 1B 28 55 ESC U and vertical basic step size LnHnPn LnHnPn LnHnPn Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Pn
179. es listed below it is assumed that the printer is connected to paral lel interface LPT1 of the PC If a different interface to LPT1 is used e g LPT2 LPT3 COM1 COM2 the address in the examples must be correspondingly altered Further details on the serial interface are to be found later in the manual Chapter 5 Printer Control TYPE E v CTRL P Itis possible to print an ASCII or print file by using the TYPE com mand and diverting the output to the LPT1 device Example TYPE C AUTOEXEC BAT gt C TEXTS LETTER TXT gt In the first instance the file AUTOEXEC BAT is printed from the root directory and in the second case the file LETTER TXT is printed from the TEXTS subdirectory Files are copied between diskettes and hard disk and other devices by means of the COPY command Thus files can also be transmitted to the printer by means of COPY When using the COPY command the option B should be activated so that binary and graphics files can also be copied without any limitations Example COPY B C AUTOEXEC BAT COPY B C TEXTS LETTER TXT LPT1 Similarly one can also copy characters directly from the keyboard to the printer by means of the COPY command Example COPY CON THIS IS A SMALL TEST Ctrl Z or F6 After entering the control character CTRL P hold down the CON TROL Key and press the P key te
180. ets A table of all the character sets and code pages is to be found in Chapters 10 14 and Appendix B 4 9 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Rear Feed Bottom Feed Top Feed Line Spacing Select between 6 lines per inch corresponds to 1 6 inch line spacing or 8 lpi corresponds to 1 8 inch line spac ing Form Tear Off If this function is activated continuous paper is automatically transported to the tear off position after the time pre set in the menu 500 ms 1 sec 2 sec The OFF setting switches the Form Tear Off function off Further information on this function is to be found in the chapter Paper Handling Skip Over Perforation Select Yes if you wish continuous paper to be automatically transported to the top of the next page 2 54 centi metres 1 inch before it reaches the bottom edge of the page If page formatting is performed by the software set this item to No in order to avoid problems Page Width This menu item is only offered with wide printer mod els Select the page width for the paper you are using The standard setting is 13 6 inch Page Length Select here the page length for the paper you are using to ensure the initial printing position is the same for each page Line Spacing select between 6 Ipi lines per inch corresponds to 1 6 inch line spacing or 8 corresponds to 1 8 inch line spac ing Bottom Margin When Valid is set a bottom margin of one inch 2
181. f Form When printing cut sheets with cut sheet feeder CSF this command has no effect Skip over Perforation Normally a standard length can be set in the Page Length menu item though the page length can also be defined by one of the above commands in inches or in the number of lines If Page Length Control is set to by MENU Setting the start position for the sheet is not reset Defining the page length in lines is done as a function of the current line spacing However any subsequent change of line spacing does not change the page length When using these two commands to change the page length the form start position is reset a Skip over Perforation defined by command is deactivated and the value for the skip over perforation selected in the menu item is used Set vertical tabs are deleted Function Dec Hex ASCII Set current print head 27 52 1B 34 ESC 4 position as Top of Form When entering this command the new TOF Top of Form is set at the respective position of the print head However the Top of Form can also be defined via the control panel This is described in Chap ter 2 If Page Length Control is set to by MENU Setting this com mand is ignored for cut sheets Function Dec Hex ASCII Activate Skip over 27 78 1B4En ESC Nn Perforation n 1 to 255 Deactivate Skip over 27 79 1B 4 ESC O Perforation With this function the lower area of a page can be skipped automat ically There is a Form Feed to the st
182. f the value 20 cpi is set in the menu item SI Select Pitch 12 CPI If the value 12 CPI is selected in the menu the command SI will be ignored if start ing from 12 cpi The following table shows the possible pitches when using the command for double width printing 10 3 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Double width printing The pitch can also be defined via the CHARACTER PITCH menu item or via the control panel The spacing can also be defined via a multifunction command Function Dec Hex ASCII Start double width 27 87 49 1B 57 31 ESC W 1 Stop double width 27 87 48 1B 57 30 ESC W 0 Start double width 14 or OE or SO Stop double width 20 14 DC4 before end of the line With these commands you can extend characters to double their normal width If the actual character width is for example 12 cpi the printer will print at 6 cpi after a command for double width printing The following table shows all possible combinations The command Double width printing for one line is especially suita ble for titles and headings as the function is automatically deacti vated at the end of the line If a double width printing command is to be cancelled before the end of a line you must send a DC4 or ESC W 0 command If double width printing is permanently activated via the command ESC W 1 this function can only be cancelled by entering ESC W 0 in this case DC4 has no effect Pitch Double width printing 10 cpi 5 cpi
183. fer after 200 ms or 1 s have elapsed If the memory threshold of 512 bytes is not rea ched during the busy status of 200 ms or 1 s the printer only signals its ability to receive data when more than 512 bytes of memory are available D 26 Appendix D Interface Data Timing diagram X ON X OFF Protocol Daten Daten Buffer Capacity 8 KBytes Capacity of I F 512 Buffer OmA Busy Signal x hz 15 20 mA Ee 200 ms 1 s Block format unblocked Error message a parity error is displayed as 40H Display of Busy Status as soon as the capacity of the interface buff er drops below 512 Byte the printer sends a DC3 signal to the sender indicating that no data can be received The signal DC3 is only sent as long as data is sent to the printer see note If after 200 ms or 1 s 512 bytes or more memory is available the printer sends the signal DC1 to the sender indicating that it is ready to receive data The signal DC1 is only sent as soon as 512 Byte or more memory is available Select the setting 200 ms or 1s in the Busy Time menu Timing diagram 0 mA Data Receive Daten Daten Buffer D gt D 15 20 mA OM Data Send Buffer gt B 15 20 L gt 200 ms 1 s If data is sent while the printer is unable to receive data the code is sent every time data arrives at the printer D 27 Appen
184. ffer Functions set by this command are not reset nor is the receive buf fer deleted Function Dec Hex ASCII Delete last character 127 7F DEL This command deletes the last character entered into the print buf fer Spaces are also deleted by this command If the last received character was a horizontal tab one space only but not the whole tabulator jump is deleted If the character to be deleted defines gra phic data the command is ignored Backspace Delete Buffer Delete last character 14 23 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Initialize printer Unidirectional printing Function Dec Hex ASCII Initialize printer 27 64 1B 40 ESC This command deletes all data in the print buffer and activates the values selected in the print menu Functions set via the control pa nel are reset This procedure is also called initialization If in the menu Reset Inhibit is set to Yes the command is not executed Numerous software packages send a reset command to initialize the printer before or after printing In this way it is ensured that values used in a previous printing process are not inadvertently used for a subsequent print job Function Dec Hex ASCII Start unidirectional 27 85 49 1B 55 31 ESCU1 printing Stop unidirectional 27 85 40 1B 55 30 ESCUO printing To optimize throughput printing of lines normally takes place al ternately forwards from left to right and backwards short line see
185. from the computer is therefore not interrupted If the receive buffer becomes full however the printer is not ready to receive for a longer period because of the large volume of data in the buffer which it has to process If your system issues an error message when the buffer is set to a large size e g unit error through time out you need to set a smaller buffer The result is that the time intervals during which the printer is not ready to receive are short er Your system is consequently able to send data to the printer at shorter intervals In general it is advisable to set the receive buffer as small as possi ble where the computer places the print data in temporary storage spooling by means of a print manager for example This ap plies to large and medium sized data processing systems and when the printer is used in a network Paper Out Override If the paper end sensor detects that there is less than 1 inch 2 54 cm of paper left in the printer it stops a cur rent print job If you set Yes the sensor is deactivated thus enabling you to print to the bottom edge of the page when using cut sheets of paper Make sure when setting Yes that the printer does not print on the platen Print Registration Use this item during bi directional printing in order to improve the horizontal registration Normally the appro priate value is 0 although by setting another value you can allevi ate possible registration problems when prin
186. g 04 4 Proportional printing 02 2 12 cpi 01 1 10 cpi 00 0 If for example you want to print a section in a document underli ned double width emphasized and enhanced you would normal ly have to send four different control commands to the printer When using a multifunction command you only need to read off the values for the individual functions from the following table Underline 128 Double width 32 Enhanced 16 Emphasized 8 Add up the values found and set the result for parameter n in the multifunction command n 128 32 16 8 164 As soon as you send this command all nine of the above functions are activated or deactivated according to the parameter n In order to determine which print attributes you can obtain with this com 14 8 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions mand you should run the following BASIC program which prints a sample of each of the possible combinations As 256 combinations are available in total it takes some time until all examples are prin ted out on about 12 pages 10 multifunction command EPSON 10 20 FOR 1 0 TO 255 30 LPRINT LPRINT 40 LPRINT CHR 27 CHRS I ESC i selects this combination 50 NEXT i Tabulators Function Dec Hex ASCII Horizontal tabulators Skip to next horizontal tab 9 09 HT Set horizontal 27 68n 1B44n ESC Dn tabs n 00 n 00 n NUL n 1 to 255 110 32 Clear horizontal tabs 27 68 0 1B 44 00 ESC DNUL
187. ge OCR B Orator Swiss Bold Gothic typeface according to menu 5 555555555 NN N This command allows you to select a font Courier is the most usual standard font while Gothic gives your documents an at tractive appearance If you need a machine readable font for special applications then select OCR B You can also use the menu mode or the PRINT QUALITY button on the printer s control panel to se lect a typeface Function Dec Hex ASCII Select typeface 27 91 73 1858 49 ESC I 50 05 00 m mp P m mM m p p r r r 1 1 1 In this command the Font ID m and m is defined by the following sequence Select font The OCR B consists of the 14 characters 0123456789 gt lt All other characters are available in Courier 10 1 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions m integer value Font ID 256 m Font ID m 256 Following values for m and m are fixed m m Typeface 0 0 no change 0 8 Courier 0 11 Courier 0 18 Courier 0 49 Courier 0 85 Courier 0 92 Courier 0 98 Courier 0 171 Courier 0 223 Courier 0 226 Courier 0 12 Prestige Elite 0 80 Prestige Elite 0 86 Prestige Elite 0 100 Prestige Elite 0 164 Prestige Elite 0 221 Prestige Elite 0 155 Roman 0 159 Roman 0 166 Roman 0 167 Roman 0 87 Letter Gothic 0 222 Letter Gothic 0 255 Letter Gothic 0 3 OCR B The parameters p and p define the character space cpi in incre men
188. gned 9 Current Loop D to printer printer receive signal Receive loop for serial data 10 Current Loop D to printer return line for D signal Receive loop 1112 not assigned 13 Signal Ground SG Signal Ground 14 17 not assigned 18 Current Loop B Send loop from printer printer send signal for serial data 19 Current Loop B Send loop from printer return line for D signal 2025 2 not assigned D 23 Appendix D Interface Data Interface selection The functions of the circuit B gt B differ depending on the protocol used When selecting a protocol the functions are ad justed automatically Ready Busy Protocol indicates that the printer is not ready to re ceive data This type of protocol is also used for error detection X ON X OFF Protocol serial data from printer the printer only sends the codes DC1 and DC3 Centronics Blocked Duplex Protocol serial data from printer the printer only sends the codes ACK and The selection of different interface modes the transmission proto col and the number of lines used for the transmission is determined by the arrangement of the five jumpers SP1 to SP5 as shown in the table below and by the menu settings of the printer You select the different modes by setting short circuit jumper SP2 appropriately The menu setting of the printer determines whether the Ready Busy protocol or X ON or
189. graphic densities whereby the program converts the graphics on the screen into graphics data which the printer can interpret Should you wish to write your own programs for graphics and in dividual characters you should first acquaint yourself in detail with the way bit image graphics work Irrespective of whether you are printing an image or designing downloadable characters and loading them into the printer your program always has to define the pattern of the dots to be printed Physically the print head of your printer is constructed with two vertically arranged columns each of 12 pins The graphics data for these 24 pins are on the other hand structured into 3 columns lying one below the other each with 8 dot lines The data are sent to the printer as a sequence of bytes each of 8 bits To each of the eight bits of these three bytes is assigned a pin of the print head and can ac cept the value 1 or 0 With a value of 1 the corresponding pin is used to print If a bit has the value 0 the associated pin is not used Following an 8 bit graphic is defined Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Picture a byte as a column of 8 dots each corresponding to a bit With bit image graphics data in columns of this kind are printed next to each other If you are writing your own program you must convert the bit by bit dot pattern into a decimal or hexadecimal for mat and send it byte by byte to the printer The following diagram shows how yo
190. handling 3 1 Paper jam 8 2 Q Paper lever 2 3 3 2 PAPER PARK function 3 11 QUIET 2 6 Paper separator 1 7 2 2 Paper support 1 1 1 5 2 1 Parallel 4 14 Parallel Interface general D 1 pin description D 2 signal level D 3 Appendix Index Glossary R T Raising the paper support 1 6 Table of contents Rear Feed 4 10 TEAR 2 6 Rear view 2 3 Tear Off edge 3 15 Reliability A 5 Technical data A 1 Remove transport packing 1 3 Testing options 8 7 Removing paper separator 1 8 Text styles Removing the paper support 1 7 TOF 2 6 RESET 2 8 TOF function 3 13 Responsibility for transportation XIX Feed 4 10 Ribbon cassette 1 1 2 2 Trademarks G 1 Ribbon cassette inserting 1 4 62 Troubleshooting 8 1 Roll paper stand Type and size of bar code C 3 general 7 25 installation 7 25 U paper feed 7 26 RS 232C Interface Unpacking the printer 1 1 general D 5 UTILITY 2 7 pin assignment D 6 signal level D 7 test D 10 wiring D 8 Warning symbols XVII RS 422A Interface Working noise 4 general 0 15 connections 2 15 menu options D 14 pin assignment D 12 signal level D 13 test D 21 transmission protocols D 15 5 Safety advice XV SEL 2 4 SEL 2 5 Selecting the Bar code C3 Serial I F 4 14 Serial interface 2 3 Serial Interface RS 232C D 5 Serial Interface RS 422A D 11 Servicing XVI SET 4 2 Set Up 4 11 Setting Top Of Form 3 13 Setting up the printer 1 1 1 3 SHIFT 2 5 S
191. hapter 11 IBM Graphics Graphic densities Graphics of low resolution This relates to 8 pin modes which are supported by most graphics programs running under DOS With these graphics it is first neces sary to choose the reproduction ratio which defines the assignment of graphic bits to the pins of the print head and thus also the graphic resolution for the graphics modes Function Dec Hex ASCII Activate single 27 75 1B 4B ESCK density graphics n n n n n n Activate double density 2776 1B 4 ESC L graphics and half print n n n n n n speed Activate double 27 89 1B 59 ESC Y density graphics n n n n n n Activate quadruple 27 90 1B5A ESC Z density graphics n n n n n n n total number n 256 n total number graphic characters 256 As with 24 pin graphics of high resolution you also create a bit pat tern in this case as a series of dot columns In doing so each graphic column is described in the 8 pin modes with one byte The variables n and communicate to the printer how many bytes of graphic data will follow Remember here that in 8 pin mode only one data byte is available per graphic column The resolution of the four graphic densities of low resolution de pends on the item Aspect ratio described later The initiating command sequence for graphic printing determines one of the four possible resolutions Applying to the graphics modes that can be activated with ESC Y and ESC Z is the re
192. heet of paper is fed in as far as the top of the page If continuous paper is in use and being fed from the back or below the paper is advanced to the next top of form position TEAR The top edge of the sheet is transported beyond the top of the page to the form tear off position so that continuous paper al ready printed can be torn off How to change the tear off position is described further on PARK You can use this button when continuous paper is inserted to change over to cut sheet feed temporarily without having to re move the continuous paper from the printer Pressing this button causes continuous paper that is being fed from the back or below to be pulled back to the park position in order to free the paper path for cut sheets The Park function is described further on QUIET In quiet mode the printing noise typical for matrix printers is alleviated by reducing the printing speed You activate or deacti vate quiet mode by pressing this button When quiet mode is acti vated the associated indicator lamp lights TOF This button is used to set the first printable line or top of page Top Of Form TOF for continuous paper If there is no sheet in the paper path the Top Of Form is reset to the standard setting 8 9 mm or 1 3 inch 2 6 Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer In this mode you can adjust the printer to your individual require ments The functions you select are automatically activated when yo
193. hort reference H 1 Socket panel 2 3 Switching between paper formats 3 11 Symbol Sets 4 9 F 4 Appendix Index Glossary Glossary Most terms are also explained in the context of the different sections You will find these explanations via the index ASCII Character Set American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standardized code for the character repre sentation in computers which comprises as a 7 bit character set including 128 letters fig ures special characters and control charac ters Backspace BS The print head is moved one character posi tion to the left Bar Code A small area with bars of different widths containing coded information A bar code is grasped with optical readers Depending on the printer type a bar code is part of the in cluded fonts or can be printed as graphics Baud Rate The speed of serial interfaces is given in steps per seconds the unit is one baud Common interfaces transmit exactly one bit per step In this case the step speed corresponds to the data transmission rate having the unit bits per second bps Bidirectional Print In the first line the print head moves from the left to the right in the second line the direc tion is vice versa This increases the print speed Bit The smallest information unit in data processing It can have the value 0 or 1 Eight bits are combined to one byte One byte can represent 256 different values Bit Map
194. ible Diagram 6 D 19 Appendix D Interface Data Diagram 7 Protocol X ON X OFF Printer status line TD HP 24541B Printer Menu Settings SD A 9 SSD 3 Serial I F Option Protocol SD B 10 SSD 21 RD A 3 SD 4 Busy Line DSR Signal Invalid RD B 18 SD 22 RD 6 RD 24 RS 7 RS 25 5 9 CS 27 DM 11 DM 29 TR 12 TR 30 GND19 IAVYAVAR In this circuit example connecting a HP 24541B interface board with the RS 422A interface of the printer the ports SD A Pin 9 and SD B Pin 10 are connected to ports RD Pin 6 and RD Pin 24 of the printer interface as shown in example 6 In this circuit example HP 24541B interface board connected to the RS 422A interface of the printer the ports SD A Pin 9 and SD B Pin 10 are connected to the ports RD Pin 6 and RD Pin 24 of the printer interface These are the two transmission lines for the print data The two lines for the printer status are established by connecting the ports RD A Pin 3 and RD B Pin 18 with the ports of the printer interface TR Pin 12 and TR Pin 30 Please note the Ready Busy lines in this circuit although port RD B Pin 18 on host side is specific for the RS 422A interface the second line is connected to port RD A Pin 3 of the RS 232C inter face This ensures correct transmission of data with most applica tions but it cannot be guaranteed for all a
195. id if 06H A determines the type of printing position odd relative printing position from current position A even absolute printing position from left margin determines the direction of the relative positioning odd backwards even forward A is invalid if A is even numbered P P Set printing position Low order half byte is valid 0 9 High order half byte is invalid The absolute relative printing position is calculated as follows P 1000 P 100 P 104 P 1 The unit for positioning is as follows LO 1 360 inch UTL 1 240 inch If the bar code is positioned so that it extends beyond the right mar gin printing is suppressed If the positioning extends the bar code beyond the right margin a CR LF Carriage Return Line Feed is performed C 20 Appendix D Interface Data Appendix D Interface Data The printer s interface has to be configured according to the specifi cations of your computer system This is particularly important when using a serial interface One prerequisite for making up an interface cable is basic knowl edge about interface signals and wiring You should also be famil iar with the use of soldering irons Otherwise the purchase of an interface cable is recommended Parallel Interfacing Centronics In a parallel interface the bits of one byte are transmitted simultane ously via eight separate lines Additional lines con
196. ident Italics Print quality character pitch and typeface 10 7 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Character size Line spacing n Print mode Pitch Font 8 Data Processing Quality 12 cpi resident 10 Letter Quality 12 cpi resident 12 Data Processing Quality 12 cpi resident 14 Letter Quality 12 cpi resident 16 Data Processing Quality 17 1 cpi resident 18 Letter Quality 17 1 cpi resident 20 Data Processing Quality 17 1 cpi resident 22 Letter Quality 17 1 cpi resident 24 Data Processing Quality 15 cpi resident 26 Letter Quality 15 cpi resident 32 Data Processing Quality 20 cpi resident 34 Letter Quality 20 cpi resident DLL Down Line Loadable Font generator The printer gives you two different print qualities In data proces sing quality UTL a print speed of 260 characters per second cps at 10 cpi is reached printing being bidirectional i e one line from left to right the next line from right to left etc This quality is suita ble in particular for extensive lists and drafts Letter quality LO which reaches a speed of 87 cps at 10 cpi should be used to create correspondence or documents With this print quality the characters are printed in a high dot pattern resolu tion This enables the creation of attractive documents when using a word processor These print qualities can be selected via the menu item Print Mode or the control panel Function Dec Hex ASCII Character size 27 91 64 1B
197. ill be set to 24 The length of the Start Centre and the Stop bar for EAN and UPC codes is n 10 n 15 180 10 180 inch Appendix Bar codes 4 n selects the width of one bar code character The minimum width of one character is 1 360 inch If you select the value 0 for the current setting will be used gt 8 n will be set to 7 With the bar code types EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E and Code 128 the width of one bar code character is determined by The maximum values of a bar code character are listed in Table 1 Refer to Table 2 for the width of the individual modules With Code 39 or Interleaved 2 5 the width of the black bar code ele ment is determined by n Refer to Table 3 to determine the character width of Code 39 refer to Table 4 and Table 5 to determine the character width of Code Interleaved 2 5 The width of the modules are identical with Code 39 and Interleaved 2 5 Refer to Table 6 and Table 7 to determine the width of the individual modules for these two types of bar codes 5 You select the width of the space elements with n is ignored with EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E or Code 128 When using Code 39 or Interleaved 2 5 n determines the width of the space element The minimum width of the space element is 1 360 inch If 0 previous settings are used If n 2 8 n is set to 7 6 The ratio between the wide and the narrow elements is deter
198. int head will move to the left end of the platen and the active indicators on the operator panel will light 5 The paper can now be transported to the initial printing position by pressing the FF LOAD button Note that you require special continuous paper in order to use the roll paper stand 7 27 Chapter 7 Accessories Installation Technical details on these interfaces such as pin assignment configuration by means of the printer menu and interface diagnostics are to be found in Appendix D Interface data Interface cards In addition to the built in parallel interface three other different serial interface cards are available RS 232C e RS 232C Current Loop e RS 422A This section explains how to install the interface card Caution There is electricity present and therefore a risk of an electric shock Switch off the printer and remove the plug from the power socket A Warning Static charges can damage the interface Leave the interface card in its protective packing until the instructions describe when to install it 1 Switch off the printer and remove the parallel interface cable 7 28 Chapter 7 Accessories 2 Remove the panel on the right rear side of the printer by breaking it out with a slot head screwdriver or by cutting it out with a knife 3 Take the card out of its pack ing and slide the card along the guide slot as far as the stop inside
199. inter that the printer is ready 4 Send Data SD from printer Data sent from printer 22 Send Data SD from printer 6 Receive Data RD to printer Data sent to printer 24 Receive Data RD to printer 4t Ready to Send RS from printer With the Ready Busy protocol this signal indicates 25 Ready to Send RS from printer that the printer is ready 9 Clear to Send CS to printer Data transmission starts when printer confirms 27 Clear to Send CS to printer the signal as Space 11 Ready to Send DM to printer Indicates that data can be sent The data is received as soon as the printer confirms 29 Ready to Send DM from printer this signal as Space 12 Terminal Ready TR from printer With the Ready Busy protocol this signal indicates whether the printer is ready 30Terminal Ready TR from printer to receive data 2 5 8 10 Not assigned 13 to 18 20 23 26 28 31 to 37 19 Signal Ground SG Signal Ground D 12 Appendix D Interface Data In the printer menu you can select Pin 3 and 21 SSD 7 and 25 RS or 12 and 30 TR as Busy line Usethe menu option DSR Signal to select whether the signal DM is evaluated option valid or ignored option invalid by the printer The signal levels described below are equivalent to the EIA Stand Signal levels ard RS 422A MARK Polarity 0 2 to 6 0V LOW OFF Logical 1 SPACE Polarity 0 2 to 6 0V HIGH ON Logical 0 Input Circuit equival
200. ion Programming graphics Graphics of low resolution Graphics densities Aspect ratio Print alignment IBM Control Code Tables XI Chapter 13 13 1 13 1 13 2 Chapter 14 14 1 14 2 14 6 14 8 14 9 14 12 14 15 14 17 14 18 14 19 14 20 14 22 14 27 14 27 14 31 14 33 14 35 14 41 Chapter15 15 1 15 4 15 5 15 8 15 9 15 11 15 12 15 15 15 17 15 17 Chapter 16 IBM Character Sets IBM Character Sets National Character Sets Code Pages Epson Standard Functions Print quality Print modes Print attributes Multifunction commands Tabulators Positioning Page formatting Line spacing Paper feed Control of Cut Sheet Feeder Character Sets Other commands Additional ESC P2 commands Step size and character spacing Vertical print position Print area Select font Character sets and code pages Epson Graphics and downloadable characters Bit image graphics Graphics of high resolution Programming graphics Graphics of low resolution Programming graphics Print alignment Downloadable characters Generate downloadable characters Additional ESC P2 commands Raster graphics Epson Control Code Tables XII Chapter 17 17 1 17 1 17 2 Appendix A Appendix B B 1 B 2 B 3 Appendix C 2 2 3 C 8 C 17 C 18 C 20 Appendix D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 10 D 11 D 12 D 13 D 14 D 15 D 16 D 17 D 21 Epson Character Sets Epson Character Sets
201. ion commands you can when using a dual bin Cut Sheet Feeder define from which bin paper is to be fed When using the dual bin feeder Top of Form positions can be set for each bin You can select the priority bin in the printer menu with CSF Bin Select in the SET UP group You can then define via the control panel the Top of Form position for the paper from the bin selected via the menu You can for example feed a form with pre printed letterhead from one bin with a Top of Form position at a large distance from the top edge of the sheet followed by single sheets from the other bin with a Top of Form position near to the top edge of the sheet 10 20 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Select Cut Sheet Feeder 27 91 70 1B 5B 46 ESC 30 03 00 ETX NUL mmm mmm m m m The parameter m defines the paper feed m 1 means manual pa per feed With m 3 the current bin is selected again The parame ter m is reserved and must be at 0 or 1 The parameter m selects a bin when a Cut Sheet Feeder with two bins is installed m 1 se lects bin 1 with m 2 the next sheet is taken from bin 2 Character sets Function Dec Hex ASCII IBM character set I 27 55 1B37 ESC7 IBM character set II 27 54 1B 36 ESC 6 The IBM character sets are constructed as 8 bit character sets i e a character is assigned to each bit combination of a byte with control commands being assigned to some values in the
202. is of 1 1440 inch Function Dec Hex ASCII Form feed Form feed 12 0C FF If a form feed FF command is sent the printer prints all data in the line buffer and sets the current print position at the start of the next page You can also advance a page to the start of the next page by pressing the FF key on the control panel 10 19 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Printing cut sheets Bin selection These commands are only effective when using a dual bin Cut Sheet Feeder CSF available as an accessory Control of the Cut Sheet Feeder Function Dec Hex ASCII Insert single sheet 272573 1B 1949 ESC EM I Eject single sheet 27 25 82 1B 19 52 ESC line feed command feeds sheet of paper from the Cut Sheet Feeder CSF to the set Top of Form Any sheet of paper already in the printer is ejected before a new one is fed in The eject command causes data in the printer buffer to be printed and the sheet to be ejected If the page end or the area to be skipped at the page end is reached the sheet is ejected and a new sheet is automatically fed in and advanced to the print position Any de fined Top of Form position however is disregarded Therefore when a Cut Sheet Feeder is installed the page change in the case of multipage documents must be done with the form feed command Function Dec Hex ASCII Select bin 1 27 25 49 1B 19 31 ESC EM 1 Select bin 2 27 25 50 1B 19 32 ESC EM 2 With the two bin select
203. is used to set the preferred po sition of the print head to suit the width of the paper format to be printed The resultant reduction in print head movement optimises penetration and over saturation of the ribbon is largely avoided Refer to the table below to choose the recommended menu settings for the width of the paper format to be printed Depending on the type of paper it may be that the MODE1 and MODE2 settings can be used with paper widths larger than stated in the table With heavier paper that is wider than A4 the DEFAULT setting may be necessary paper narrower 12 5 to 21 0 cm wider than 12 5cm 20 9 A4 portrait than 21 0 cm narrow MODE1 MODE1 DEFAULT model wide 1 MODE2 MODE2 DEFAULT model MODE1 segment 10 to 50 10 characters per inch Default position 60 2 platen narrow model MODE1 segment 10 to 50 MODE2 position 55 Default position 60 platen wide model MODE2 only appears for wide printer models The diagram shows the preferred position of the print head in relation to the selected menu item The print head is driven from this position to the next print position with the shortest possible path being chosen 4 13 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Parallel I F This menu item applies only to Epson emulation Serial CSF Type The menu item CSF Type only appears for wide printer models If you are working with a wide cut sheet f
204. ised servicing or through improper maintenance by unauthorised personnel XVI Advice and warning symbols Observe all warnings and instructions stated on the product itself and in the accompanying documentation At particularly impor tant points in the manual warnings are marked with appropriate symbols NOTE text passages marked thus contain supplementary informa tion or instructions WARNING damage this symbol indicates a possible cause of damage Follow all instructions to prevent damage CAUTION risk of injury this symbol indicates a possible source of danger Follow all instructions to prevent injury CAUTION electricity this symbol indicates a possible source of danger Follow all instructions to prevent injury through an electri cal shock CAUTION hot this symbol indicates a possible source of danger Follow all instructions to prevent injury through heat Should you wish to replace the ribbon do not touch the print head until it has stopped mov ing and has cooled down Printhead is HOT PEE BE 5 XVII Meaning of text styles in the manual To emphasise important passages in the text or differentiate between the meaning of a printer function and a printer message the following text styles or emphases are used in the manual BOLD BLOCK CAPITALS represent the display lamps of the control panel Bold letters indicate the groups positions and settings of the printe
205. ity with a reproduction ratio of 5 6 have a resolution of 60 x 72 dots per inch Graphics of double density and half speed with a reproduction ratio of 5 6 have a quasi resolution of 120 x 72 dots per inch Dots can be positioned with a horizontal accuracy of 1 120 inch Directly adja cent dots in the horizontal direction are not printed If therefore a dot appears in a certain row no dot may be set in the next column of the same row Otherwise every second dot is ignored Vertically adjacent dots are not subject to any restrictions Graphics of quadruple density with a reproduction ratio of 5 6 have a quasi resolution of 240 x 72 dots per inch In this density dot co lumns overlap by 3 4 of the width of a dot whereby only every second dot in a row can be printed If a dot appears in a certain row and a dot is likewise set in the next column of the same row this is not printed Vertically adjacent dots are not subject to any restric tions The assignment of the individual bits of a graphic byte with the re production ratio 5 6 for the four possible resolutions is portrayed in the following table 11 10 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics bit number of the graphic byte assigned printer pins 7 MSB 1 3 6 3to 5 5 6to 8 4 8 to 10 3 11 to 13 2 13 to 15 1 16 to 18 0 LSB 18 to 20 The initiating command sequence for printing the graphic determi nes one of the four resolutions When the aspect ratio 1 1 is chosen
206. king bidirectional printing In order to improve the alignment of lines lying underneath one another you can stipulate with this function that each line be printed starting from the left margin uni directional printing You should use this option when precise ver tical alignment of the individual lines is desired bit image gra phics IBM graphic characters tables The print speed is somewhat reduced with unidirectional printing as the print head after printing a line is reset to the left margin to start the next line there This function can also be activated for prin ting bit image graphics via the Graphics menu item Function Dec Hex ASCII Start unidirectional 27 60 1B 3C ESC lt printing for one line This command resets the print head to the left margin print start position to print the line following this command The effect of the command is unidirectional printing for one line Printing then con tinues bidirectionally unless unidirectional printing is selected 14 24 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Start print suppress 19 13 DC3 Stop print suppress 17 11 DC1 After receiving DC3 the printer ignores all further data except for the command to end print suppress The SEL lamp blinks in print suppress mode After ending print suppress the SEL lamp is lit and the printer is in ON LINE mode Print suppress can also be deacti vated via the SEL key on the control panel
207. kness Lever position 0 48 mm 1 0 55 mm 2 0 62 mm 3 0 69 mm 4 0 76 mm 5 Chapter 3 Paper handling Paper feed cut sheets The paper support ensures precise automatic feeding of cut sheets 1 Move the paper lever on the right of the printer to the TOP position cut sheet 2 Switch the printer on 3 Raise the paper support by lifting it at the back and slid ing it into its locking posi tion A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted Chapter 3 Paper handling 4 Insert a sheet of paper into the paper support and adjust the rails of the paper guide so that they just touch the edges of the paper Start by aligning the left edge of the paper to the mark provided The paper is automatically fed into the printer after the time set in the menu gt Note The left edge of the paper must be no more than 1 2 cm from the end of the platen 5 Redefine the top of form if necessary by means of the Top Of Form function as described further on Paper feed continuous paper Long lists and large printing jobs are typical applications for contin uous paper which can be fed in from the bottom or rear of the printer as required Feeding continuous 1 Move the paper lever on the paper from the rear right of the printer to the internal tractor Continuous paper
208. l panel by simultaneously pressing the SHIFT and PRINT QUALITY keys If this mode is activated the data in the printer memory are printed out With this mode switched on the following commands cause indication of the next print position by the above mentioned mar king Indicate next print position 14 13 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Text alignment Space with print head positioning 255 dec FF hex Backspace BS Horizontal Tab HT Carriage Return CR Line Feed com mands Form Feed FF commands for defining the Next Print Po sition Delete Buffer CAN Delete Character DEL If the functions Underline or Overscore are switched on then spaces with positioning i e spaces skipped by horizontal tab or posi tioning commands are underlined or overscored the next print position is then not displayed Function Dec Hex ASCII Text alignment 27 97 18 61 ESC an n 0 Left justified n 1 Centred n 2 Right justified n 3 Full justified With this command you define the alignment of text on a line The standard left justified function means that the text is aligned on the left margin while it is ragged on the right With the centred function the text is positioned in the centre between the left and right margins With the right justified function the text is aligned on the right margin while it is ragged on the left With the full justification function the text is aligned f
209. lable fonts Test ASCII sample Hex dump mode Reset printer menu Reset top of form Reset printer menu and top of form SEL Print mode Line Feed Form Feed Load paper SEL SEL PARK FF LOAD E ca 5 QUIET QUIET TEAR Be GBs BB 2 POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON Appendix H Short reference Print mode Form tear off Park position sprocket paper PARK Activate Deactivate Quiet mode SEEN Activate Menu mode SEL Menu mode A fp Y Activate Menu mode SEL Print all menu items PARS PRINT Select menu group GROUP Select previous menu group GROUP Select menu item ITEM H 2 Appendix Short reference Previous item of a menu group Select menu value set Previous value of a menu group Save and exit menu mode Top Of Form __ Micro feed down Micro feed up Save Top Of Form Reset Top Of Form to default TEAR m 4 PARK FF LOAD ITEM TEAR SET SEL EXIT L FF LOAD QUIET QUIET POWER H 3 Appendix Short reference Print position lt 7 PRINT QUALITY TEAR PARK Indicate print position Set print position to the left Set print position to the right Declaration of Conformity CE
210. lamp shows the currently activated font and print quality There are two print qualities available LQ Letter Quality in letter quality text is printed out with the highest resolution The fonts listed below are available in this quality Use one of these fonts when you wish to print high quality documents Courier gt COURIER is lit Prestige gt PRESTIGE is lit Roman gt COURIER and GOTHIC are lit Swiss gt PRESTIGE and BOLD are lit Swiss Bold gt BOLD is lit Gothic gt GOTHIC is lit UTILITY In data processing quality printing is faster but the resolution is not as good as letter quality In data processing quality there is no choice of fonts You can print a list of the available fonts and their appearance This is described in Chapter 8 These settings determine the width of a character in characters per inch cpi The settings 10 12 15 17 1 and 20 cpi are available The setting also known as pitch is normally 10 or 12 cpi for standard texts However should you wish to print more information on one page in sheets of calculations for example it is advisable to use a character pitch of 15 17 or 20 cpi Proportional spacing PROP makes the text more readable and gives it a typeset like appear ance Remember that the printing speed is reduced for fonts of higher quality The Print Quality and Character Pitch functions can also be controlled by means of the software 2 8 Chapter 2 g
211. length of a block of data equals the capacity of the interface s printer buffer This capacity should not exceed 1 KByte If a parity error occurs or if the buffer overflows during the trans mission the block causing the error is ignored a NAK signal is sent and the block is requested again Connections of the Current Loop Interface Please note that closed loops are created when using a current loop interface in order to connect the sender host to the receiver print er Connections with one or more current loops can also be produced If only one current loop is used only the blocked Centronics Blocked Duplex transmission protocol can be used When using only one circuit the receiving and sending circuit of the host and printer must be connected in series It is therefore not possible to receive print data and send status messages simultaneously Each current loop has to contain a power source which can be made available by either the host or the printer Several power sources are not allowed within one loop Only example circuits are listed below as it is not possible to show the numerous Current Loop interfaces with the different circuits The required printer configuration is explained in detail As an example the connection of the IBM Asynchronous Commu nication Adapter to the Current Loop interface of the printer is de scribed With this adapter the operating mode can be set to RS 232C interface or Current Loop interface
212. lied Rearrange the jumpers only when the printer is turned off The component layout diagram of the printed circuit board for the Component layout coresident serial RS 232C Current Loop interface and the arrange diagram ment of the jumpers SP1 SP5 is shown in the following figures __ 4 402 106 Au 05 tele 2 EN fuse SP 3 Pin Assignment SP1 Protocol Selection SP4 Power Source Receive Loop 5 2 RS 232C Current Loop 5 5 Power Source Send Loop D 25 Appendix D Interface Data Ready Busy Protocol Transmission Protocols The following pages explain the transmission procedures of the three different types of protocol If the printer is unable to receive data the current loop for signal B opens when the 50 us following the stop bit of the last character is received Timing Diagram Startbit Stoppbit OmA _ D 15 20 mA 50 us max Power Loop open Uu EE Power Loop ees closed 15 20 mA Block format any Error Message a parity error is displayed as 4OH Display of Busy Status the minimum interval during which the printer is unable to receive data is selected in the Busy Time menu The interval for the Busy signal can be set to either 200 ms or 1 se cond The printer is not ready to receive data if the capacity of the inter face buffer drops below 521 bytes The printer is ready to receive data again when 512 bytes are free in the printer buf
213. llow for three transmission protocols The protocols are determined by the arrangement of jumpers or can be selected in the printer menu The following pages contain information about the correct jumper assignment and the correct menu selections for each mode as well as general technical details and information about transmission protocols asccannan 05 Term Description Interface type RS 232C Current Loop coresident Data transmission Serial Start Stop Synchronisation Transmission rate bit s 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 bit s Number of data bits 7 or 8 Bits Parity Even odd or no parity D 22 Appendix D Interface Data Term Description Number of stop bits one or more bits Transmission protocols three protocols Interface connection on printer side on cable side 25 pin plug DB 25S or equivalent 25 pin plug DP 25P or equivalent Interface signals see table for interface signals The interface signals pin assignment and circuits of the RS 232C coresident interface are not mentioned again here as they are like the simple RS 232C interface described earlier in this chapter Current Loop Interface Pin assignment Pin Signal Direction Description 1 Protective Ground PG connected to the printer s casing 2 6 not assigned 7 Signal Ground SG Signal Ground 8 not assi
214. lt 21 point Size gt 21 point 1 lt lt 71 10 5 point 10 5 point 72 lt lt 127 10 5 point 10 5 point double height double width double height double width 14 39 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Downloadable characters downloaded from system Character pitch Size lt 21 point Size gt 21 point 1 lt lt 71 loaded bitmap loaded bitmap double height 72 lt Pn lt 127 loaded bitmap loaded bitmap double width double height double width Printing in draft quality If a proportional font is selected by means of this command Pn 1 the printer replaces the draft quality with the font selected in the menu in letter quality If Utility is selected in the menu the font is replaced by Courier If a fixed character pitch is selected by means of this command printing takes place with the selected character pitch and character sizes stated in the table above for the bitmap character sets If no point size is specified in this command Lp and Hp 0 the point size is selected which was previously defined with this com mand If the point size is deleted or not set printing takes place with a size of 10 5 point The following commands are suppressed if this command is used for scaling fonts ESC W double width font ESC w US font in double height ESC SP set character separation SI ESC SI condensed font SO ESC SO double width font for one line If by means of this command a fix
215. ltaneously press the SHIFT and Down buttons to be able to use the Micro Feed Down function Micro Feed Up The paper is transported forwards in steps of 1 180 inch upwards Simultaneously press the SHIFT and Up buttons to be able to use the Micro Feed Up function SHIFT To be able to use the bottom button functions such as MENU and TOF simultaneously press the SHIFT button and the corresponding button SEL Switches the printer ON LINE or OFF LINE as you wish The associated indicator lamp is switched on or off Pressing the SEL button also cancels a currently running self test which is described in Chapter 6 The assignment of the buttons mentioned below is independent of the operating status of the printer If the printer is in ON LINE or OFF LINE mode the functions named at the top of the buttons are effective Button functions in ON LINE OFF LINE mode Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer LF Pressing this button Line Feed causes the printer to feed the paper forwards by one line If a cut sheet feeder is fitted accessory and there is no paper in contact with the platen pressing this but ton will cause a new sheet of paper to be fed from the current paper tray to the first printable line on the paper FF LOAD Pressing this button FF Form Feed causes the printer to transport the next sheet of paper to the top of the page and eject the previous one If a cut sheet feeder is in use a new s
216. lush between the left and right margins by inserting spaces between the words With centred right and full justification a backspace cannot be exe cuted In fully justified a carriage return or line feed command can only be executed at the end of a paragraph not after each line i e the text must be sent to the printer as flowing text 14 14 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Page formatting Function Dec Hex ASCII Page length in lines 27 67 18 43 ESCC n n 1 to 127 Page length in inches 27670n 1B4300n ESCCNULn n 11022 By selecting page length you can inform the printer of the size of the paper used When is switched on the current position of the print head is registered as Top of Form i e first print line on the page When printing forms it is important that the page length is set to the dimensions of the form so that not only the first but also all follo wing form sets are printed in the right position Normally a standard length can be set in the Page Length menu item though the page length can also be defined by one of the abo ve commands in inches or in the number of lines For the latter it must nor exceed 50 inches Otherwise the command will be igno red If Page Length Control is by MENU Setting the start position for the sheet is not reset Defining the page length in lines is done as a function of the current line spacing However any subsequent change of line spacing does not change the
217. mit data be tween printer and computer In a parallel in terface the eight bits of one byte are transmit ted simultaneously via eight data lines Oth er signal lines control the data transmission handshake Parameter Most commands require additional variables which are mainly figures These parameters are given either as printable ASCII charac ters or as decimal or hexadecimal figures Pitch See cpi Platen The platen transports the paper and acts up as a pad for the stroke of the needles See also dot matrix printer Port A port is an interface of the computer or printer to exchange data Printer Driver printer driver is a kind of translator to convert the text and graphic commands of a software program into a language under standable for the printer Print Head The print head comprises the needles which strike the ribbon onto the paper See also dot matrix printer Program The operating system controls the basic func tions of the computer such as input output and system administration Word processors spreadsheets or graphic programs can be oper ated by means of application programs Proportional Font Each character occupies solely the space of its actual width l requires less space than m for instance By using proportional fonts documents get a font like professional look See also set character spacing F 9 Appendix Index Glossary Protocol
218. moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down lt A 7 gt 7 5 1 Switch off the printer and open the printer cover 2 Remove the ribbon cassette from the holder see also Chapter 6 Chapter 3 Paper handling 3 Release the locking plate of _ Locking plate the print head by moving the plate upwards and side ways 4 Remove the locking plate and place it to one side 5 Remove the print head from its slot 6 Take out the spacing plate Spacing plate Chapter 3 Paper handling 7 Insert the plate in front of the print head holder making sure that the plate fits even ly 8 Replace the print head in the slot of the print head car riage 9 Place the locking plate onto the print head holder mak ing sure that the pin on the left of the holder properly fits into the hole in the lock ing plate Hole in locking plate Chapter 3 Paper handling 10 Pivot the locking plate down thus securing the print head 11 Replace the ribbon cassette 12 Close the cover of the printer and switch on the printer By repositioning the distance plate the gap between the print head and the platen is increased You are now able to print onto materials of the following thickness Paper thic
219. n process a stack of cut sheets without having to re feed every single sheet Cut sheet feed ers with two feeding devices are also availa ble F 6 Appendix Index Glossary Decimal A term for a digit of the decimal system based on the number 10 DIP Switch Dual Inline Package A DIP switch is an electronic component of ten a series of small switches It serves to pre set the printer Dot The smallest addressable unit in bit maps One bit is assigned to every dot The bit can have the value 1 for black set dot or 0 for white non set dot Dot Matrix Printer The print characters are made up of dots dot matrix The needles strike the colour ribbon onto the paper and produce a dot Depend ing on the number of pins 9 18 and 24 pin printers are distinguished The needles are arranged in one or two columns Common needle diameters are 0 3 mm for 9 pin print ers and 0 2 mm for 24 pin printers The reso lution depends on the needle size it defines the typeface dpi dots per inch The graphic resolution is given in dots per inch Usual resolutions for needle printers are between 60 and 288 dpi Driver See Printer Driver Duplicates With print sensitive paper or duplicating pa per with carbon duplicates copies can be made because the printing is performed by stroke Three duplicates for 24 pin printers and four duplicates for 9 pin printers are common Emulation Emulation means th
220. n using the dual bin feeder different Top of Form positions can be set for each bin You can select the priority bin in the printer menu with CSF Bin Select in the Set Up group You can then de fine via the control panel the Top of Form position for the paper from the bin selected via the menu You can for example feed a form with preprinted letterhead from one bin with a Top of Form position a large distance from the top edge of the sheet followed by single sheets from the other bin with a Top of Form position near to the top edge of the sheet Single sheet printing These commands are effective when using a Cut Sheet Feed er CSF available as an acces sory Bin selection These commands are effective when using a Cut Sheet Feed er CSF with two paper bins 14 19 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Extension of printable characters Assign character set Character sets Function Dec Hex ASCII Activate extension of 27 54 1B 36 ESC 6 printable characters Deactivate extension 27 55 1B 37 ESC 7 The Epson Character Sets are constructed as 8 bit character sets i e a character is assigned to each bit combination of a byte with con trol commands being assigned to some values in the range from 0 to 31 The standard ASCII characters are assigned to the range from decimal 32 to 126 The value 127 DEL in the Epson emulation has the function of deleting the last character in the line buffer The ran ge
221. nd 11 13 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Notes on graphic programming Make sure you enter exactly the same amount of column bytes as specified by n and n in the LPRINT instruction otherwise you will not obtain the required results Only the number of columns can be printed which are the maximum permissible for the respective combination of printer model and graphic density If an LPRINT instruction contains more data this can result in unwanted effects Remember the restrictions which apply to double density and nor mal speed and to quadruple density in relation to dot placing In these cases miss out at least one dot position between two dots in the same dot line Adjacent dots are not printed The various programming languages offer the experienced user virtually unlimited possibilities for graphic programming Print alignment If you place great store on vertical alignment over several graphic lines and can accept a low print speed select the setting Unidirec tional in the menu Graphics With this setting printing only takes place from left to right and this will avoid any horizontal offset in vertical lines which can arise with bidirectional printing With the menu item Print Registration for bidirectional printing you can adjust the vertical alignment of graphic lines to each other The standard setting for print alignment is 0 If you are not satisfied with the alignment you can set this value from 0 25 mm to the l
222. ne Host Printer Assignment of Short Circuit Jumper SP4 D 9 4 D 10 gt SP1 SB Centronics Blocked Duplex SP5 M8 A t 3 Z AB wt B 18 P SPESE B 19 SP5 S A Ps GND7 In combination with this circuit you can only use the Centronics Blocked Duplex protocol in order to ensure the correct transmission of data One must differentiate between 2 wire connections see diagram 13 Technical note and 14 and circuits in which only the receive loop D gt D of the printer is connected Strictly speaking these are 4 wire circuits see dia gram 8 to 11 in which the send loop gt B of the printer is not integrated in the circuit It is therefore not possible to control the print er status Ready to Receive or Receive Buffer Full This circuit is often used by measuring systems and unit controls to which a log printer is connected Received data is printed immediately without having to store it in the buffer Even if a low transmission rate is used no data is lost To ensure a constant power supply of 15 mA to 20 mA the wire resist ance as well as the number of electronic components in the current loop has to be considered This means that the appropriate current control resistors of the power source used have to be adjusted to the prevailing electrical conditions on either the printer or the computer The above mention
223. ng positions corresponds to the setting displayed under CHARACTER PITCH 3 14 Chapter 3 Paper handling Automatic advance to Form Tear Off position If this function is active printed pages of continuous paper are transported from the TOF position to the Form Tear Off position to allow you to tear them off there To do this the continuous paper must be fed from the rear or via the additional bottom tractor feed accessory from below gt Note Do not use the Form Tear Off function in conjunction with continuous labels on backing paper or with multi layer forms as this can cause a paper jam Activate this function after setting the top of form position by Use of the printer menu is means of the menu item Form Tear Off for the paper path Rear described in Chapter 4 Feed rear of printer or Bottom Feed bottom tractor feed by changing it from Off to the required time pause After a 500 ms one or two second pause without any further print data the paper is transported to the tear off position You can then tear off the paper if you wish The serrated tear off edge which you can use when the top part of the printer cover is fold ed forwards is provided for this purpose If further data is sent to the printer the page is pulled back to the current printing position or top of form Serrated tear off edge Chapter 3 Paper handling Checking the top of form Changing th
224. ng is given in characters per inch cpi Shift Key By pressing this key a second key function is activated Transportation Unit It transports continuous paper safely and ex actly The spikes of the transport rollers grip the punched holes of the paper to push it or pull it For pushing the transportation unit feeds the continuous paper from the reverse or bottom side through the printing mecha nism For pulling the transportation unit pulls the paper from the top side from the printing mechanism Unidirectional Print The printer prints only in one direction from the left to the right Especially suited for the precise print of graphics F 10 Appendix Trademarks Appendix G Trademarks OKI and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Co Ltd Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation IBM IBM PC PC DOS and ProPrinter are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation MS DOS and MS Windows are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation DR DOS is a registered trademark of Novell Inc Telix is a registered trademark of EXIS Inc ProCOM is a registered trademark of DATASTROM TECHNOLO GIES Inc Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Corporation Siemens and High Print are registered trademarks of Siemens Nixdorf Informationssysteme AG Appendix Short reference Appendix H Short reference Test avai
225. ngth of 80 characters After receiving the data of 80 data bytes a carriage return with line feed is sent automatically to the printer Since graphics normally consist of a large number of bytes this limit is soon exceeded and the image in question is printed out incorrectly You can get around this problem by setting the line length to the maximum permissible value of 255 To do this enter one of the following instructions at the beginning of your program For parallel printers WIDTH LPT1 255 For printers with serial interface which have been opened as 1 WIDTH 1 255 Example 10 REM 24 pin graphics demo program IBM ProPrinter X L 24 20 OPEN lptl bin FOR OUTPUT AS 1 WIDTH lptl1 255 REM Prepare for output 30 FOR MODE 1 TO 4 40 IF MODE 1 THEN PRIN 1 24 pin single density 13 10 10 D 8 GOTO 80 50 MODE 2 THEN PRIN 1 24 pin double density 13 10 CHRS 10 D 9 GOTO 80 60 IF MODE 3 THEN PRIN 1 24 pin triple density 13 10 10 D 11 GOTO 80 70 MODE 4 THEN PRIN 1 24 pin sextuple density 13 10 10 D 12 80 PRINT 27 g 96 3 D 90 REM 27 is the density defined in lines 32
226. nical Data Code pages Bar codes Interface data Paper formats and printing areas Index Glossary Trademarks Short reference VII Table of contents IV XV XVI XVII XVIII XVIII XIX XIX Chapter 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 7 1 8 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 Chapter 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 2 5 Legal note Guidance through the manual Safety advice Servicing maintenance Advice and warning symbols Meaning of text styles in the manual Consumables accessories Machine readable fonts Further information Assembling and setting up Unpacking the printer Checking the items supplied Assembling the printer Location Power supply Setting up the printer Removing the transport packing Inserting the ribbon cassette The paper support Fitting the paper support Raising the paper support Removing the paper support The paper separator Removing the paper separator Fitting the paper separator Connecting the printer to the computer Connecting the printer to the power supply Emulation printer drivers A guided tour of the printer The printer and its components Front view Inside view Rear view The operator panel The indicator lamps The buttons 2 5 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 9 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 7 3 8 3 8 3 11 3 11 3 11 3 11 3 13 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 16 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 10 4 1
227. ode128 SetC 40H 10 Calculation of Checksum If a checksum code is sent after the data has been sent the printer will calculate the checksum and print the checksum instead of the checksum code However you can calculate and transmit the checksum yourself Calculating the Checksum for EANG UPC A Interleaved 2 5 a add all odd numbered data positions starting on the left hand side b a 3 c add all even numbered data positions starting on the left hand side d b c e d mod 10 f 10 e fis the check digit Example bar code data 12345679 a 1234547 16 b 16 3 48 2 4 6 12 d 48412 60 e 60 mod 10 2 0 60 10 2 6 Remainder 0 f 10 0 10 f 0 If f 10 it is set to f 0 Checksum is 0 Appendix Bar codes If the amount of print data for Code Interleaved 2 5 is an odd number 0 is added This 0 is the first bar code character Calculating the checksum for EAN13 a add all even numbered data positions start on the left hand side b 3 c add all odd numbered data positions starting on the left hand side d b c e d mod 10 f 10 e f is the checksum Example bar code data 123456789012 2 4 6 8 0 2 22 22 3 66 1 3 5 7 9 1 26 d 664 26 92 e 92 mod 10 2 92 10 9 Remainder 2 f 10 2 8 checksum is 8 No calculation takes place for UPC E it does not print the check sum Calculating the Checksum for Code 39 All values of the
228. offset Function Dec Hex ASCII Start enhanced 2771 1B 47 ESC G Stop enhanced 2772 1B 48 ESC H With enhanced the dot patterns of the characters are printed verti cally offset Emphasized and enhanced can be combined to particu larly highlight selected text Function Dec Hex ASCII Start underline 27 45 49 1B 2D 31 ESC 1 Stop underline 27 45 48 182030 5 0 This command causes all printable characters including spaces to be underlined Graphics and spaces skipped by a horizontal tabula tor are not underlined Function Dec Hex ASCII Set score type 27 40 45 182820 5 30 03 00 NUL 1n n 01 n n SOH n n This command lets you specify the style and location of line sco ring The parameter n defines the location n the style of the line 14 6 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions n Location n Style 1 underline 0 cancel scoring 2 strike through 1 single line overscore 2 double line 5 single broken line 6 double broken line Function Dec Hex ASCII Start superscript 27 83 48 1B 53 30 ESC S0 Start subscript 27 83 49 1B 53 31 ESC 51 Stop super subscript 27 84 1B 54 ESC T Superscript characters are printed above the normal characters and are used for exponents and other typographical effects Subs cript is particularly suitable for chemical formulae H O Su perscript and subscript characters are represented in all pitches in half character height and normal characte
229. ommands must be separated in each case by a carriage return CR and a line feed LF The length of the graphic lines may not go beyond the right mar gin of the page The time pause between the two commands may be no longer than one second Graphics of quadruple density at a aspect ratio of 1 1 have a quasi resolution of 240 x 60 dots per inch At this resolution only 6 of the 24 pins of the print head are used per graphic byte In order to increase the throughput the printer under certain conditions prints four graphic lines in one pass if this is possible The following table shows the assignment of pins when printing out a four line graphic of quadruple density in one pass 11 12 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics bit number of the graphic byte assigned printer pins 7 MSB 1 60r 5 2 4 3 3 4 2or1 5 0 LSB 6 7 MSB 7 5 8 4 9 3 10 2or1 11 0 LSB 12 7 MSB 13 60r5 14 4 15 3 16 2or1 17 0 LSB 18 7 MSB 19 5 20 4 21 3 22 20 1 23 0 LSB 24 In order to guarantee the grouping of graphic lines described abo ve the following conditions must be fulfilled The line spacing must be 8 240 inch The command sequences with ESC Z commands must be sepa rated in each case by a carriage return CR and a line feed LF The length of the graphic lines may not go beyond the right mar gin of the page The time pause between the two commands may be no longer than one seco
230. on and data transmission Some characters are usedto activate printer functions as shown in the corresponding chapters The entering of control codes may vary from program to program ASCII Dez Hex Ctrl ASCII Dez Hex ASCII Dez Hex ASCII Dez Hex NUL 0 00 5 32 20 64 40 96 60 SOH 1 01 A 33 21 A 65 41 97 61 STX 2 02 AB 34 22 66 42 b 98 62 ETX 3 03 AC 35 23 67 43 c 99 63 4 04 D 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ENQ 5 05 AE 37 25 69 45 101 65 6 06 amp 38 26 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 G 39 27 71 47 5 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 72 48 h 104 68 9 09 AT 41 29 I 73 49 1 105 69 LF 10 0A J 42 2A J 74 j 106 VT 11 OB K 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 0C AL 7 44 2 L 76 4 1 108 6 13 OD AM 45 2D M 77 4D 109 6D 50 14 OE AN 46 2E N 78 AE n 110 6E SI 15 OF O 47 2 79 o 111 6F DLE 16 10 P 0 48 30 80 50 p 112 70 DC1 17 Q 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 R 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 DC3 19 13 75 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73 DC4 20 14 AT 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 NAK 21 15 U 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 5 22 16 6 54 36 86 56 v 118 76 ETB 23 17 W 7 55 37 87 57 119 77 24 18 X 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78 EM 25 19 Y 9 57 39 89 59 121 79 SUB 26 77 58 Z 90 5 7 122 7 5 27 1B 4 i 59 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C 60 3C N 92 5C 124 7C GS 29 1D 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D RS 30 1E gt 62 A 94 5
231. on as Top Of Form Activate Skip over 27 78 1B 4E 5 Perforation Deactivate Skip over 27 79 1B 4F ESC O Perforation 12 3 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Page formatting Line spacing Function Dez Hex ASCII Set left and right 27 88 1B 58 ESC X margins n n n n n n Set top and bottom 27 91 83 1 5 53 ESC S margins 40 04 00 EOT NUL m m P P m P P m P P Function Dez Hex ASCII 1 8 inch line spacing 27 48 1B 30 ESC 0 7 72 inch line spacing 27 49 1B31 ESC 1 Set 1 6 inch line spacing 2750 1B 32 ESC 2 AGM Menu defined line spacing 27 50 1B 32 ESC 2 without ESC A n Deactivate ESC A n 27 50 1B 32 ESC 2 line spacing Select variable line 27 65 1841 ESC An spacing n 72 inch Select variable line 27 65 1841 ESC An spacing n 60 inch AGM Set variable line 2751n 1B 33n ESC 3n spacing n 216 inch Set variable line 2751n 1B 33n ESC 3n spacing n 180 inch AGM Set variable line 273756n 1B2538n 5 9 spacing n 360 inch 12 4 Chapter 12 IBM Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Paper feed Line feed 10 OA LF Reverse line feed 27 93 1B 5D ESC Variable line feed 27 74 1B4An ESCJn n 216 inch n 0 to 255 Variable line feed 27 74 1B4An ESCJn n 180 inch AGM n 0 to 255 Variable line feed 27 3752n 1B2534n ESC 4n n 360 inch n 0 to 255 Set line spacing units 2791924 1B5B5C 04 ESC N EOT 0000n 00 0
232. ontinuous paper First mount the continuous paper in the tractor feed Notes on the use of continuous paper are to be found in the chapter Pa per handling Hold down the LF button when switching on the printer Should you wish to check the data being sent by the computer to the printer use the hexadecimal output All data sent to the printer including text and printer commands will then be printed in he xadecimal form and ASCII format with all codes that are non prin table in ASCII format shown as dots To activate this mode hold down the FF LOAD button and the SEL button when switching on the printer For this test too you can use the different methods described for feeding cut sheets and conti nuous paper The line of BASIC 10 LPRINT 27 0 30 This is an example of a hexadecimal dump would be printed as follows Hex Data Dump 1B 30 IE 54 68 69 73 20 69 73 20 61 6E 20 65 78 0 5 is an ex 61 6D 70 6C 65 20 6F 66 20 61 20 68 65 78 61 64 ample of a hexad 65 63 69 6D 61 6C 20 64 75 6D 70 2E OD OA ecimal dump Should you wish to return to normal print mode switch the printer off and on again 8 8 Chapter 9 Packing the printer for transportation Chapter 9 Packing the printer for transportation Should you need to send off or transport the printer dispatch change of location repairs follow the instructions below to ensure the secure packing of your machine Printers not p
233. op underline 27 45 48 182030 5 0 Set score type 27 40 45 182820 ESC 30 03 00 NUL Inn 01 n n SOH n n Start superscript 27 83 48 1B 53 30 ESC 50 Start subscript 27 83 49 1B 53 31 ESC 51 Stop super subscript 27 84 1B 54 ESC T Start italic 27 52 1B 34 ESC 4 Stop italic 2553 1B35 ESC 5 Start outline 27 1131 1B 7101 ESC q SOH Start shadow 27 1132 1 71 02 ESC q STX Start outline and 27 1133 1B 71 03 ESC shadow Stop outline or 27 1130 1B 71 00 ESC NUL outline 16 2 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Function Dez Hex ASCII Multifunction commands Print quality character 27 33 1B 21n ESC pitch and font Function Dez Hex ASCII Tabulators Horizontal tab position 9 09 HT Set horizontal tab 27 68 1B 44 ESC D nn 00 n n 00 n n NUL Clear horizontal tab 27 68 0 1B 44 00 ESC D NUL Vertical tab position 11 OB VT Set vertical tab 27 66 1B 42 ESC n n 0 n n 00 n n NUL Select vertical 27 47 1B2Fn ESC n tabulator channel Load vertical format 2798n 1B62n ESCbn m m My IM m m 0 00 NUL Function Dec Hex ASCII Positioning Absolute horizontal 27 36 1B24 ESC dot position n n n n n n Relative horizontal 27 92 1B5C ESC dot position n n n n n n Start indication 27 1051 1B 6901 ESC iSOH Stop indication 27 105 0 1B 6900 ESC i NUL Text alignment 27 97 18 61 ESC an 16 3 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Page formatting Line spacing
234. ottom and select the driver that most closely match es the name of your printer 5 1 Chapter 5 Printer Control is Note The lower the printer driver appears in the list the fewer the functions supported Epson Emulation IBM Emulation OKI ML 3390 3391 OKI ML 3390 3391 OKI ML 590 591 Elite OKI ML 590 591 Elite OKI ML 590 591 OKI ML 590 591 OKI ML 390 391 Elite OKI ML 390 391 Elite OKI ML 390 391 OKI ML 390 391 Siemens High Print 4008 N10 Siemens High Print 4008 N10 Siemens High Print 4008 N60 Siemens High Print 4008 N60 Epson LQ 870 1170 IBM ProPrinter X24 4207 Epson LQ 850 1150 IBM ProPrinter XL24 4208 Epson LQ 1500 Epson LQ Some software packages permit modification of the printer driver Such a modification however requires an intensive study of the program and the control commands of the printer A list of the avail able functions and the associated control commands is to be found in Chapters 10 and 14 of this manual Please refer to the manual of your application program for more detailed notes on installation and modification of the printer driver If in doubt contact your soft ware manufacturer or supplier Chapter 5 Printer Control Characters and control characters The print data is transmitted by character Every character is repre sented by 8 bits and thus expresses a certain position within the character set currently selected Most character sets are based on ASCII code
235. ou can start printing D 10 Appendix D Interface Data RS 422A Serial Interface The RS 422A interface is often used when data is transmitted over long distances max 1 2 km The type of data transmission is the same as used by the RS 232C interface but the pin assignment and the signal levels are different The transmission parameters of the RS 422A interface configuration on the printer side must therefore correspond to the system s parameters in this case as well Jumper SP1 The position of jumper plug SP1 should never be changed If the interface s control program is stored in the microprocessor SP1 has to connect the two pins close to the interface connection Position 1 If the control program is stored in the EPROM SP1 has to con nect the two pins pointing away from the connection see figure The interface cable has to meet the following requirements 37 pin plug equivalent to DC 37P Plug housing equivalent DC C1 J16 Interface boards may vary in design Appendix D Interface Data Shielded twisted pair data transmission cable IBM Type 1 UL and CSA certified The printer has 37 375 connector Pin assignment Pin Signal Direction Description 1 Protective Ground FG xn Connected to the printer s casing d Flow Control 550 from printer With the Ready Busy protocol this signal indicates 21 Flow Control SSD from pr
236. p Lp Hp Lp Hp Ln 0 to 255 Hn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Lp 0 to 255 Hp 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command the printing position is adjusted absolutely in the vertical direction to the current top of page or to a set top mar gin of the printing area in multiples of the current basic step size The parameters Ln and Hn specify the number of parameters follo wing this Hn integer number of characters 256 Ln number of characters Hn 256 For this command Hn 0 and Ln 2 must be set With Ln Hn 256 lt 2 this command is ignored With Ln Hn 256 gt 2 all Ln Hn 256 2 data following Pn are ignored The parameters Lp and Hp specify the absolute vertical distance of the print position from the current top of page position or a set top margin of the print area in multiples of the current basic step size 1 360 1 180 1 120 1 90 1 72 1 60 The initial setting of the step size for this command is 1 360 inch 14 31 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Relative vertical print positioning Hp integer absolute position 256 Lp absolute position Hn 256 This command is ignored if a position is specified which is more than 46 2 inches away from the current top of page position or a set top margin of the print area or a position is specified which requi res a feed backwards of more than 0 5 inch By using this command several times even a feed of more than 0 5 inch backwar
237. panish II ESC R VT 12 Latin America ESC R FF 13 French Canadian ESC RCR 14 Dutch ESC R SO 15 Swedish II ESC RSI 16 Swedish III ESC R DLE 17 Swedish IV ESC R DC1 18 Turkey ESC R DC2 19 Swiss I ESC R DC3 20 Swiss II ESC R DC4 64 Publisher ESC R 17 1 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Code Pages n Code Page Select 22 Polska Mazovia ESC R SYN 23 ISO Latin 2 ESC R ETB 24 Serbo Croatic I ESC R CAN 25 Serbo Croatic II ESC R EM 26 Multilingual 850 ESC R SUB 27 Norwegian ESC R ESC 28 Portugal ESC R FS 29 Turkey ESC GS 38 Greek 437 ESC R amp 39 Greek 928 ESC R 40 Greek 851 ESC R 41 Greek 437 Cyprus ESC R 42 94 ESC R 43 French Canadian ESC R 44 855 ESCR 45 Cyrillic II 866 ESCR 46 X East Europe Latin II 852 ESCR 47 Greek 869 ESC R 49 Windows East Europe ESC 1 50 Windows Greek ESC R 2 51 Latin 5 Windows Turkey ESC R 3 52 Windows Cyrillic ESC R4 54 Hungarian CWI ESC R 6 55 Kamenicky MJK ESC R 7 57 Turkey 857 ESC R 9 60 Hebrew NC 862 ESC lt 61 Hebrew ESC 62 Windows Hebrew ESC R gt 66 Ukrainian ESC RB 67 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 ESC RC 68 Windows Baltic ESC RD 72 Bulgarian ESC RH 74 Baltic 774 ESC RJ 17 2 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets ASCII Character Set The American Standard Code for Information Interchange is a standarized character set of printable characters bold and control codes The nam
238. per handling Pay particular attention to problems with paper feeding and ejection and irregularities with the print out e ASCII test on a cut sheet Should you wish to print out a continuous ASCII alphabet hold down the QUIET TOF button when switching on the printer Either insert a sheet of paper or press the FF LOAD button to have a sheet fed from the cut sheet feeder CSF ASCII test on continuous paper First mount the continuous paper in the tractor feed Notes on the use of continuous paper are to be found in the chapter Pa per handling Press the QUIET TOF button when switching on the printer The continuous test runs for several pages until terminated by pres sing the SEL button The continuous ASCII sample is printed over the entire printable area of the platen so make sure with the wide model that appropriate paper is inserted Continuous ASCII sample Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Available fonts NI Hex dump mode This test will help you to check the current print quality and the available fonts The print out of available fonts covers one page and ends automatically but can also be cancelled prematurely by pres sing the SET button e Font test on a cut sheet You can obtain a print out of all available fonts by holding down the LF button when switching on the printer Either insert a cut sheet or press the FF LOAD button to have a sheet fed from the cut sheet feeder CSF Fonttest on c
239. pplications D 20 Appendix D Interface Data If an application is confused by the fact that the software printer signals X ON and X Off are also sent to port RD B Pin 18 with dual function for software and hardware signals the correct transmis sion of data with this interface board on host side is not possible Interface Test You can start a self test of the serial interface by using a test loop plug The following plug is required for an interface test of the RS 422A interface If the menu option Diagnostic Test is set to Yes and the test loop plug is connected to the se rial interface a self test is car ried out automatically The re sult of the test will be printed This process is repeated until the printer is turned off The printer will return to normal printing operation and is ready to receive data when the menu option Diagnostic Test is set to No Canon DC 37P or equivalent plug RS 422A To set the printer to menu mode while Diagnostic Test is set to Yes hold the MENU key down while switching the printer on D 21 Appendix D Interface Data Interface boards may vary in design Technical data The transmission format of 7 bits without parity is not valid Coresident RS 232C Current Loop Interface The arrangement of a short circuit jumper on the printed circuit board determines whether this interface board is used as RS 232C or Current Loop interface Both modes a
240. printer Yes select Valid No select Invalid When is a DTR signal sent When turning the printer ON LINE select Ready on Select When turning the printer on select Ready on Power Up Which pulse duration is required for a Busy signal 200 ms select 200 ms 1 second select 1 D 14 Appendix D Interface Data When using a serial interface set the menu options in above table as required by your system s interface After selection of the desired options it is recommended to print the menu Transmission Protocols You can select the two protocols for the serial transmission inter face RS 232C and RS 422A in the print menu as explained below The signal Busy is enabled Busy when less than 256 bytes are available in the interface buffer The signal is disabled Ready after 200 ms or 1 second if sufficient buffer capacity has been freed with in this period of time If printing the buffer takes longer than 200 ms or 1 second the signal is disabled Ready as soon as sufficient ca pacity is available This protocol uses the ASCII characters DC3 decimal 19 and DC1 decimal 17 for the control of data transmission As soon as there are less than 256 bytes available in the buffer the code DC3 informs the sender that no more data can be received The code DC3 is transmitted until no more data is transmitted If it is possible to print the buffer within 200 ms or 1 second after having sent a DC3 signal
241. r for one of these Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Location Power supply Assembling the printer Make sure the printer is standing on a stable flat surface To prevent overheating make sure there is free space all around the printer openings should not be covered Never place the printer directly next to a radiator or the air outlet of an air conditioning system Do not expose the printer to direct sun light the printer does not come into direct contact with liquids no objects are pushed into the ventilation slots of the printer as you run the risk of an electric shock or other injury or causing damage to the printer you only perform routine maintenance on the printer as de scribed in the manual Opening the case can result in an elec tric shock or other harm Make sure you always remove the plug from the power socket before opening the case Do not alter the printer in any way not described in the manual as this may cause damage to the printer and result in repairs for which you will be liable Like all electrical devices the printer can be damaged by electro static charges Static charges can form when walking on un suitable floor coverings for example and are then transferred to the device by touching the case Bear this in mind when choos ing the location for the printer Ensure yourself that the ratings of the power supply match the ratings shown on the back of the printer If
242. r menu e BLOCK CAPITALS indicate the mode of the printer e Italic BLOCK CAPITALS indicate the buttons of the control panel Brackets highlight a printer function Consumables accessories To ensure that the printer operates perfectly and provides the proper print quality we recommend you use only original ribbons or accessories supplied by us We accept no liability for damage resulting from the use of non original ribbons or accessories which would have been avoided by using original ribbons or accessories Original ribbons and accessories can be purchased from your supplier To ensure good printing results make sure you keep ribbons and printing materials paper transparencies etc for the shortest time possible Materials should be kept no longer than one year XVIII Machine readable fonts The perfect readability of fonts such as OCR A OCR B or bar codes EAN UPC Zip by machines is affected by the printing technique resolution edge sharpness the technical state of the printer the quality of the printing medium toner ink ribbon the state of the print material glossiness smoothness coating age reflection surface uniformity the technical state of the reading device Further information Leave your printer components in their packing until the manu al expressly describes when and how to install them Do not fit or use the serial and parallel interface cables at the same
243. r of the printer The printer and its components Front view paper support printer cover operator panel platen knob The operator panel indicators inform you of the operating status of the printer You can also use it to enter settings and test the printer The platen knob enables you to advance the paper when the print er is SWITCHED OFF The paper support enables precise feeding of cut sheets of paper The printer cover consists of two sections and protects the printer mechanism from dirt and reduces the printing noise Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer Inside view print head and paper seperator ribbon cassette The print head is the part of the printer that contains the printing pins The original ribbon cassette contains the high quality ink necessary for perfect printing The platen advances the paper during the printing process The paper separator prevents paper that has just been ejected from being drawn back into the printer 2 2 Chapter 2 A guided tour of the printer Centronics interface paper lever power switch socket panel power socket The printer and computer are connected by means of the interface socket The parallel Centronics interface or a serial interface ac cessory are provided for this purpose The socket panel must be broken out in order to fit a serial inter face Power is suppli
244. r width Function Dec Hex ASCII Start italics 27 52 1B 34 ESC 4 Stop italics 25 53 1B 35 ESC 5 Italic characters are printed sloping slightly to the right and particu larly highlight individual words sentences or whole paragraphs You can also activate this function via the menu to print a complete document in italics Function Dez Hex ASCII Start outline 27 1131 1B 71 01 ESC qSOH Start shadow 27 113 2 1B 71 02 ESC q STX Start outline and 27 113 3 1B 71 03 ESC q ETX shadow Stop outline or 271130 1B 71 00 ESC NUL outline Use the outline and shadow effect to produce more interesting and stylish headings They can be combined together as well as with emphasised and or enhanced printing Superscript Subscript Italics Outline Shadow Outline and shadow printing commands can only be used for printing characters they cannot be used to print line graphics 14 7 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Print quality pitch and font Multifunction commands Function Dec Hex ASCII Select print quality 27 33 1B21n ESC n pitch and font With this command you can select different print functions by me ans of a single sequence The parameter n defines here the combina tion of print quality pitch and font in accordance with the follo wing table Print function Hexadecimal Decimal Underline 80 128 Italic 40 64 Double width 20 32 Enhanced 10 16 Emphasized 08 8 Condensed printin
245. range from 0 to 31 The standard ASCII characters are assigned to the range from deci mal 32 to 127 In IBM character set I the range from decimal 128 to 159 is identical with that from decimal 0 to 31 while in IBM charac ter set II special characters are to be found in this range The range from decimal 160 to 255 is identical for IBM character sets I and II and contains the IBM graphic symbols and other special characters In the two following representations the non printable ranges are marked grey If there are printable characters in these ranges you can print these out with the command All character set Cut Sheet Feeder IBM character sets 10 21 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions All character set gt gt IBM character set IBM character set II The IBM character sets I and II also differ in the range from decimal 0 to 31 In character set II printable characters being assigned to the decimal values 3 to 6 and 21 which are not available in character set I The complete IBM character sets can be found in a subsequent chapter Function Dec Hex ASCII Print a character from 27 94 1B5En ESC n the all character set n character code
246. riable line 2765n 1B4ln ESCAn spacing n 60 inch n 1 to 255 Set variable line 2751 1833 ESC 3 spacing n 180 inch n 1 to 255 Set variable line 2791 1B 58 ESC spacing n 360 inch n 1 to 255 Set variable line 27 43 1B 2Bn ESC n spacing n 360 inch n 1 to 255 Usual line spacings for text are 6 or 8 lines per inch With the variable spacing commands you can define the line spac ings via the parameter n in multiples of 1 60 inch 1 180 inch or 1 360 inch This has no effect on the character height but only changes the spacing between the lines These commands do not ex ecute a line feed but only set the line spacing which is used by a following line feed command 14 17 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function Line feed Form feed Paper feed Function Dec Hex ASCII Line feed 10 0A LF Variable line feed 27 74 1B4A n ESC n 180 inch 0 255 Variable line feed 27 93 1B5Dn ESC n 360 inch n 0 to 255 Reverse line feed 27 106 1B6An ESC jn n 180 inch A line feed command causes the printer to move the print position down In contrast with a simple line feed command with a variable line feed of n 180 or n 360 inch there is no carriage return regard less of the settings in the printer menu If 0 is set for the parameter n in this command no line feed is executed The preset smallest possible step for the paper feed due to the de sign of your printer is 1
247. rint speed to half printing at half speed causing a lower noise level than printing at normal speed Function Dec Hex ASCII Set most significant bit 27 62 1B ESC gt MSB to 1 Set most significant bit 27 61 1B 3D ESC MSB to 0 Delete MSB default 27 35 1B 23 ESC The command ESC gt sets the most significant bit MSB of an in going 8 bit data word to 1 while ESC sets it to 0 ESC deactivates the MSB default selected with ESC gt or ESC so that all data are interpreted as sent by the system 14 26 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Functions Additional ESC P2 commands ESC P2 commands extend the scope of functions of the Epson emulation in the area of scalable fonts Setting step size and character spacing Function Dec Hex ASCII Set horizontal basic 27 99 1B 63 ESC step size HMI Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp 0 to 255 Hp 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command is defined the basic step size i e the spacing between two characters of a character set The parameters Lp and Hp specify the basic step size in accordance with the following formulae Hp integer basic step size 256 Lp basic step size Hn 256 HMI Lp Hp 256 360 If the parameters Lp and Hp 0 are set this command is ignored and the previously fixed basic step size remains valid If the basic step size Lp Hp 256 360 gt 3 inches is set it is fixed at 36 360 1 10 inch If the basic step
248. rtical tabs and does not move when line spac ing is changed absolute position With the skip command for the vertical tabulator the paper is transported to the next tab position If a skip command is entered without further vertical tab positions being set a line feed is executed Function Dez Hex ASCII Reset horizontal 27 82 1B 52 ESC R vertical tabs to default Use this command to cancel any tab stops you have set and return to the printer s defaults This means that horizontal tab stops will occur every eight columns and that there will be no vertical tab stops A VT command will just produce a single line feed Vertical tabulators Reset tabs to default 10 11 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Relative dot positioning Positioning Function Dec Hex ASCII Relative horiz 27 100 1B 64 ESC d dot position to the right n n n n n n Relative horiz 27 101 1B 65 ESC e dot position to the left n n n n n n With these commands you can indent a line for example at the be ginning of a paragraph where the spacing is measured in relative dot columns A dot column is the space from the centre of one point to the centre to another point within a character pattern This space is irrespective of the character space and comes to 1 120 inch With the variables n and n in this command a specific dot position can be defined at which the printout is to start The values of the variables can be calculated u
249. ry out one or more trial prints before per forming large print runs Please also read the notes in Appendices A and E 3 1 Chapter 3 Paper handling Paper lever Move the paper lever on the right side of the printer to the position that is appropriate to the feed path for the paper ij Continuous paper feed ing for continuous pa BOT per which is fed via the bottom or pull tractor feed the lever must be in the BOT bottom po sition top Cut sheet feeding for feeding cut sheets via ei ther the paper support or the cut sheet feeder the lever must be in the TOP position REAR Continuous paper feeding if continuous paper is being fed RE from the back via the push or pull tractor feed move the lever to REAR Adjusting for the paper thickness Print head lever The gap between the print head and platen is adjusted to the pa per thickness or multi part pa per by means of the blue five position print head lever on the left side of the ribbon drive Chapter 3 Paper handling Paper thickness Lever position 0 08 mm 1 0 15 mm 2 0 22 mm 3 0 29 mm 4 0 36 mm 5 Should you wish to print on thick types of paper the gap between Adjusting the print print head and platen must be increased head gap A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops
250. s USA ID 437 gt L IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 01 5 00 ER EP gt plrivlrlelalol itirlrl Epson not available 11 s c s ol lt 4 6 19 5 5 Flo J 6 6 ja je 7 7 G Wig T 8 mir 8H X hxlej y d E t o 911 Y ifty e Oyefallr J Z j z r a lt o lt m E lola gt 27 0 _ ia 1 2 5 6 7 9 Baltic ID 774 o 0 e P iz ag eal el IBM 1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 03 06 00 2155 Sm bl 1 52 4 5 5 lt 6 11 4 1 5 5 S E U e u o A L 6 _ 7 7 U slg ic 9 1 1 gt J Z j z lt K k i _ lt mln D o
251. s number of copies see details in Appendix E Original 3 copies multi part forms Cut Sheets width 182 216mm_ 7 2 8 5 inches 182 364mm 7 2 14 3 inches weight 45 90 g m 12 2410 Cut Sheets via Cut Sheet Feeder width 182 216mm_ 7 2 8 5 inches 182 364 mm 7 2 14 3 inches weight 60 90 g m 16 2415 Sprocket Paper single part forms width 76 254mm 3 10 inches 76 406mm 3 16 inches weight 45 90 g m 12 2410 Sprocket Paper multi part forms pressure sensitive width 76 254mm 3 10 inches 76 406mm 3 16 inches thickness lt 0 36 mm lt 0 014 inches lt 0 44 mm lt 0 017 inches weight 34 41 g m 9 11 lb Sprocket Paper multi part forms carbon interleaf width 76 254mm 3 10 inches 76 406mm 3 16 inches thickness lt 0 36 mm lt 0 014 inches lt 0 44 mm lt 0 017 inches weight 38 45 g m 10 1215 weight of carbon 34 g m 9 Ib Printer weight 6 9 kg narrow model 8 9 kg wide model narrow model wide model narrow CSF wide CSF narrow model wide model narrow model wide model rear paper feed bottom paper feed narrow model wide model rear paper feed bottom paper feed Appendix A Technical Data Dimensions narrow model wide model width 398mm 15 7 inches 552mm 21 8 inches height 145mm 5 7 inches 145mm 5 7 inches depth 345mm 13 6 inches 345mm 13 6 inches Dimensions including platen knob paper separator etc width 4
252. s paper from the bottom tractor feed proceed as follows 5 Part the printed pages along the perforation Press the PARK button The continuous paper is transported backwards but remains held in the bottom tractor feed Pull the paper release lever on the right side of the printer to wards the front the symbol for continuous paper handling from the rear shows the correct setting for the lever Press the FF LOAD button The continuous paper is again fed to the platen from the rear of the printer 7 24 Chapter 7 Accessories The roll paper stand The roll paper stand permits you to use telex roll paper or special paper for specific applications Check that the individual items supplied are complete and un damaged You should have re ceived depending on the mo del 1roll paper stand only narrow 1 paper support Remove the packing material Keep the original packing material safe so that you can transport the roll paper stand safely at a later date if necessary To install the roll paper stand proceed as follows A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down Checking the items supplied Installation 7 25 Chapter 7 Accessories Paper feed
253. se the following instruction LPRINT 27 CHRS 88 2 600 256 2 remainder 88 Function Dec Hex ASCII Select national 27 33 18 21 ESC n character set With this command you can replace some characters with national special characters If you want to activate one of these character sets you must insert the corresponding value from the table of na tional character sets for the parameter n Two different ASCII character sets are supported in which the nu meric character is represented with or without slash respectively and 16 other national character sets A zero with slash is particular ly suitable for documents in which it is important to distinguish between zero and upper case O Character set n ASCII 0 64 ASCII 0 65 British 66 German 67 French 68 Swedish I 69 National character sets 10 23 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Select Code Page Character set n Danish 70 Norwegian 71 Dutch 72 Italian 73 French Canadian 74 Spanish 75 Swedish II 76 Swedish III 77 Swedish IV 78 Turkish 79 Swiss I 80 Swiss II 81 Legal Publisher 90 A table with the national character sets is shown in Chapter 13 Function Dec Hex ASCII Select Code Pages 27 91 84 1B5B54 ESC T 5 0 05 00 ENQ NUL 00 00 00 NUL NUL n n 0 n n 00 n n NUL Code Pages are national variants of the IBM character set Unlike national character sets the differences are in the range 0 to 25
254. selected by menu Activate loadable 27 1162 1B 74 02 ESC t STX character set Activate graphic 27 1163 1B 74 03 ESC t ETX character set Select national character 27 82n 1B52n ESCRn set and Code Page Function Dez Hex ASCII Other commands Carriage return 13 0D CR Backspace 8 08 BS Delete buffer 24 18 CAN Initialize printer 27 64 1B 40 ESC Start unidirectional 27 85 49 1B 5531 ESCU1 printing Stop unidirectional 27 85 40 1B 55 30 ESCU0 printing 16 5 Chapter 16 Epson Control Code Tables Other commands Graphics Function Dez Hex ASCII Start unidirectional 27 60 1B 3C ESC lt printing for one line Start print suppress 19 13 DC3 Stop print suppress 17 11 DC1 Deactivate end of paper 27 56 1B 38 ESC 8 sensor Activate end of paper 27 57 1B 39 ESC 9 sensor Select print speed 27115n 1B 73 ESC sn Set most significant bit 27 62 1B ESC gt MSB to 1 Set most significant bit 27 61 1B 3D ESC MSB to 0 Delete MSB default 27 35 1B 23 ESC Delete last character 127 7F DEL Function Dez Hex ASCII High resolution graphics 27 42 m 1B2Am ESC m n n n n n n Activate single density 27 75 1B 4B ESCK graphics n n n n n n Activate double density 27 76 1B 4C ESCL graphics and half print n n n n n n speed Activate double density 27 89 1B 59 ESC Y graphics n n n n n n Activate quadruple 27 90 1B5A ESC Z density graphics n n n n n n Re assign graphics 2763 1B3Fnm
255. sette Cleaning Accessories Cut sheet feeder Checking the items supplied Adjusting the length of the feed rail Installing the feed rail Installing the cut sheet feeder Paper feed Automatic paper feed Manual paper feed Feeding of cut sheets and continuous paper Print area Selecting the paper tray Removing the cut sheet feeder from the printer Adjusting the mounting bracket The pull tractor Checking the items supplied Installation Feeding continuous paper Removing the tractor feed The bottom tractor Checking the items supplied Fitting the bottom tractor feet Installing the tractor feet Feeding continuous paper Changing between formats of continuous paper formats 7 25 7 25 7 25 7 26 7 28 7 28 Chapter 8 8 1 8 4 8 6 8 7 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 10 1 10 3 10 6 10 7 10 10 10 12 10 16 10 18 10 18 10 20 10 21 10 26 Chapter 11 11 1 11 4 11 6 11 8 11 8 11 10 11 15 Chapter 12 The roll paper stand Checking the items supplied Installation Paper feed Interface cards Installation Troubleshooting Possible faults Fault tables Major faults Testing options Packing the printer for transportation IBM Standard Functions Print quality Print modes Print attributes Multifunction commands Tabulators Positioning Page formatting Line spacing Paper feed Control of the Cut Sheet Feeder Character sets Other commands IBM Graphics Bit image graphics Graphics of high resolut
256. signal activates the auto line feed 15 Not assigned 16 OV Signal ground 17CHASSIS GROUND Frame ground 18 5V From printer 5 volt supply max 50 mA 19 30 OV B Twisted pair return for pins 1 to 11 31 I PRIME To printer Signal Low Printer controller is initialised The low level should be held for more than 0 5 ms 32 FAULT From printer When the paper end is detected this signal changes from High to Low 33 OV Signal ground 34 Not assigned 35 Not assigned 36 SELECT IN To printer The High level of this signal indicates that the printer can only be selected and deselected using DC1 and control codes Pin 14 and 18 can be activated deactivated by menu item Auto Feed XT or Pin 18 D 2 Appendix D Interface Data I Prime signal at Pin 31 is activated by the menu item I Prime If you select Invalid the signal will be ignored With Buffer Print and receiving an I Prime signal the printer will be reset after printing the content of the printer buffer On Buffer Clear the printer will be reset at once and the contents of the printer buffer will be deleted Low level 0 0 V to 0 8 V Signal level High level 2 4 V to 5 0 V Input circuit of DATA STROBE and I PRIME line Signal R1 R2 C DATA STROBE 1kQ 33 Q 560 pF I PRIME 3 3 33 Q 0 001 uF 5V Ri Parallel Data line 1 to 8 Pin 2 to 9 Input Circuit Output Circuit 5V 5V
257. sing the following table n dot position n 256 n integer value relative dot position 256 If you want to move the current print position for less than 256 point positions you must replace n by the corresponding number of dot columns and n by the value 0 If you want to move the current print position for more than 256 point positions you have to devide the number of dot columns by 256 Take the result for the values n and n and calculate according to above mentioned table Is this command send the print head position is moved by n n x 256 point positions to the left or to the right side Have you chosen an indention beyond the left or right margin this command is ignored For an indention of 80 dot columns to the left type the following formula LPRINT 27 e CHRS 80 CHRS 0 For an indention of 600 dot columns to the right type the following formula LPRINT CHRS 27 d CHRS 88 CHRS 2 600 256 2 remainder 88 10 12 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Start indication 27 105 1 1B 6901 ESC iSOH Stop indication 27 105 0 1B 6900 ESC i NUL With this command you can switch on and off the mode which en ables indication of the next print position The next print position is indicated by the character M on the red line which is on the trans parent paper protector at the front on the print head carriage This mode can also be switched on and
258. size goes over the right margin the printing is con tinued at the left margin of the next line This command is also im mediately valid within a line The character spacing last set is the current one The basic step size set with this command is overwrit ten by commands for setting character pitch and for selecting the font by means of character pitch and point size if these commands are used after defining the basic step size The following commands use the basic step size defined with this command ESC I Pn ESC Pn Set left and right margin ESC D Setting of horizontal tabs BS Backspace Setting the basic spacing The basic step size is not valid for bit image graphics and bar codes 14 27 Chapter 14 Epson Standard Function The set basic step size is deleted by the command for setting the character separation and the previously selected character pitch be comes valid again A set character separation is in turn deleted by setting the basic step size If underlining is set this is performed if this command is used The lamp display on the control panel is not altered by this com mand The commands for double width font and for double width font for one line and also the commands for condensed font are deleted by this command The basic step size is reset by the following commands and printed with the previously selected or newly set character pitch ESC P ESC M ESC g commands for setting the ch
259. so feed continuous paper Feeding continuous from the bottom This option is available if you havea printer stand paper from the or table with a slot which allows continuous paper to be fedinfrom bottom tractor feed below accessory Installation of the tractor feed and paper handling is described in the chapter Accessories An additional bottom tractor feed gives you the means of feeding Feeding continuous continuous paper from the bottom In order to be able to use this paper from the function you first have to fit the bottom tractor feed to allow the bottom tractor feed printer to be placed on the built in supports accessory Installation of the bottom tractor feed and paper handling is de scribed in the chapter Accessories Switching between continuous paper and cut sheets Park Your printer will allow you to switch without difficulty between printing on continuous paper and cut sheets The continuous paper is removed from the paper path at the press of a button You can then insert a cut sheet of paper which the printer will then draw in automatically gt Note Do not use the PARK function in conjunction with the pull tractor feed otherwise the continuous paper will run completely out of the tractor guide 3 11 Chapter 3 Paper handling Changing from continuous paper to cut sheets Do not forward paper to the PARK position by using the platen knob Changing from cut sheets to con
260. sponding cha racter that is replaced with when an alternative language character is selected by menu or command Sd Hexadecimal Value uen decimal Character Set 23 24 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5F 60 69 7B 7C 7D 7E 0 USA amp O 1 7 _ i 1 Fench amp O 8 i 2 German amp OA 00 C i 6 B 3 British amp O N _ i dopo 4 DanishI amp 8 i e 5 Swedish I m amp O _ i 46 6 Italian amp O N _ i 7 Spanish I P 00 i _ i 5 8 Japanese amp O X L 9 Norwegian m amp O E _ ie g ai 10 Danish II 95 amp OEQ _ i x g 11 Spanish II amp O i _ i 12 Latin America amp O i _ i 13 French Canadian 1 i 6 i 14 Dutch amp eoru 15 Swedish II amp O _ i 6 16 Swedish III i 6 17 Swedish IV amp m amp O OA _ i 18 Turkey 58585 O i 6 c 1 OO U C 19 Swiss I amp O amp i 46 20 Swiss II amp O g L i 64 Legal Publisher amp O w i 17 7 Chapter 17 Epson Character Sets Code Area Expansion ESC I Decimal Charac
261. status in contrast data can be transferred to the printer until the receive buffer is full The printer then signals to the system that it cannot accept any more data The data are thus retained Function Dec Hex ASCII Deactivate end of paper 27 56 1B 38 ESC 8 sensor Activate end of paper 27 57 1B 39 ESC 9 sensor With end of paper sensor activated the ALARM lamp lights when less than 0 5 inch remains to the end of the paper The printer goes into OFF LINE status At each press of the SEL key a single line is printed and a line feed executed If printing is to be to the lower margin of a sheet the end of paper sensor can be deactivated by the above command The printer then takes the page length set in the menu or by a command to establish an end of paper The end of paper sensor can be reactivated with ESC 9 The function can also be activated and deactivated with Paper out Override 10 28 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Function Dec Hex ASCII Select font via pitch te point size Select font via pitch 27 16 70 1B 1046 ESC DLE F point size Pn Pn Pn Pn Pn Pn Lp Hp Lp Hp Lp Hp Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored Pn 0 to 255 MSB ignored 0 to 255 Hp 0 to 255 MSB ignored With this command a previously selected font can be scaled within limited ranges by defining the pitch and the point size e The parameter Pn sets the number of parameters which follow this parameter In this command the parameter
262. striction that in the horizontal direction no im mediately adjacent dots may be set The dots however lie in any case so close together that a line appears to be drawn through them 11 8 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Following the command for activating the graphics mode in the re spective density are two parameters designated n and n which communicate to the printer the number of graphic columns to be printed In order to determine the values of these numbers you need to define the number of graphic columns per line to be printed and divide this by 256 The value n here is the integer component of the result n the remainder printed out as a whole number If for example 400 graphic columns are to be printed n and n are computed as follows n integer 400 256 the example n 1 n 400 256 n in the example n 144 The last part of a graphics instruction contains numerical data which contains the actual image information Each column is represented by a byte containing 8 bits in which a 1 corresponds to a dot to be printed A 0 shows that no dot is to be printed at this position The highest dot is the MSB most significant bit the lowest dot the LSB least significant bit To each column in a line is assigned a numerical value Add the values of the column positions at which dots are to be printed and insert the total sum for each column beginning from the left in your program An ex ample for the
263. super subscript 27 84 1B 54 ESC T Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Superscript characters are printed above the base line and are used for exponents and other typographical effects Subscript is par ticularly suitable for chemical formulae H O Superscript and sub script characters are represented in all pitches in half character height and normal character width Function Dec Hex ASCII Start italics 27 37 71 1B 25 47 ESC Stop italics 25 37 72 1B 25 48 ESC H Italic characters are printed sloping slightly to the right and particu larly highlight individual words sentences or whole paragraphs You can also activate this function via the menu to print a complete document in italics Multifunction commands Different print functions can be combined in a single escape se quence with multifunction commands Function Dec Hex ASCII Select print quality 27 33 1B 49 ESCIn pitch and font The parameter n defines here the combination of print quality pitch and font in accordance with the following table Insert a value from the following table for n The following print qualities and pitches can also be selected via the control panel or the menu n Print mode Pitch Font 0 Data Processing Quality 10 cpi resident 2 Letter Quality 10 cpi resident 3 Letter Quality proportional resident 4 Data Processing Quality 10 cpi resident 6 Letter Quality 10 cpi resident 7 Letter Quality proportional res
264. support feet back in again Switch the printer on The print head will move to the left end of the platen and the active indicators on the op erator panel will light The ALARM indicator which will also light indicates in this case that there is no pa per at the print position yet The paper can now be trans ported to the print position by pressing the FF LOAD button Redefine the top of form position if necessary by means of the Top Of Form function This is described in Chapter 3 Paper han dling 7 23 Chapter 7 Accessories Changing between different formats of continuous paper You can set the values for paper handling as you wish by means of the printer menu in the Bottom Feed group If you are feeding continuous paper from the rear and wish to use continuous paper from the bottom tractor feed proceed as follows 1 Part the printed pages along the perforation In ON LINE mode press the PARK button The continuous pa per is transported backwards but remains held in the bottom tractor feed Move the paper release lever on the right side of the printer to wards the back the symbol for continuous paper handling from below shows the correct setting for the lever Press the FF LOAD button The continuous paper held in the bottom tractor feed is fed in Redefine the top of form if neces sary If the print job is finished and you wish to use the continuou
265. sure safe reliable operation over many years Like all electrical devices there are a few basic precautions you need to observe These pre cautions are necessary in the first instance for your own safety but also protect the printer against any damage Please read through the manual carefully and keep it handy Make sure the printer is standing a stable flat surface To prevent over heating there should be free space all around the printer open ings should not be covered Never place the printer directly next to a radiator or the air outlet of an air conditioning system Do not expose the printer to direct sunlight the printer does not come into direct contact with liquids no objects are pushed into the ventilation slots of the printer as you run the risk of an electrical shock or could cause a fire you only perform the routine maintenance on the printer de scribed in the manual Opening the case can result in an electri cal shock or other harm Make sure you always remove the plug from the mains socket before opening the printer case Do not alter the printer in any way not described in the manual this may cause damage to the printer and result in repairs for which you will be liable Like all electronic devices the printer can be damaged by electro static charges Static charges can form when walking on unsuitable floor coverings for example and are then transferred to the device by touching the case
266. t to 2 54 centimetres Technical data resolution for example is given in inches Interface An interface is a connection between compu ter and printer to perform the data exchange Interfaces can be parallel or serial parallel interfaces Centronics transmit data simul taneously byte by byte Serial interfaces transmit data successively bit by bit Italics A type style with characters that slant up wards to the right KByte 1024 bytes are one kilobyte Landscape The paper is printed parallel to the longitudi nal edge Letter Quality LQ This font is only available for 24 pin printers because it requires a high resolution of the characters due to small needle diameters By additional dots between the character matrix a uniform typeface is achieved The print speed is reduced Line A line is a horizontal sequence of characters The width of a line is defined by the right and the left margin beginning of the line The line spacing lpi lines per inch deter mines the height of a line Line Feed LF This printer command transports the paper one line ahead By pressing the LF key a line feed can be performed manually Most times a carriage return is also performed to move the print head to the beginning of the line Line Spacing Common line spacing for the print of charac ters 6 and 8 lines per inch When printing graphics the selected line spacing must ensure that the lower needles adjoin
267. ta TD 2 and the command X ON DC1 to inform the computer that it is ready to receive data The command X OFF is used to inform the compu ter that the printer buffer is full Signal levels Circuits Ready Busy protocol X ON X OFF protocol Appendix D Interface Data PC industry standard 25 pin to 25 pin When using this circuit set the menu option Busy Line to DTR and Protocol to READY BUSY If you select the X ON X OFF protocol the setting for Busy Line is irrelevant The value DSR in the printer menu must be set to Invalid AT industry standard 9 pin to 25 pin When using this circuit set the menu option Busy Line to DTR and Protocol to READY BUSY If you select the X ON X OFF protocol the setting for Busy Line is irrelevant The value DSR of the printer menu must be set to Invalid Interface Wiring To indicate that the printer is ready to receive data select DTR SSD SSD or RTS in the Busy Line menu Computer Printer Protective 1 1 Protective Ground Ground TD 2 2 TD RTS 4 _ 4 RTS CTS 5 5 CTS DSR 6 6 DSR DCD 8 8 DCD DTR 20 20 Signal Ground 7 7 Signal Ground Computer Printer Protective 1 Protective Ground Ground RD 2 lt 2 TD TD 3 gt 3 RD CTS 8 4 RTS RTS ub CTS DSR 6 gt 6 DSR DCD 1 m gt 8 DCD DTR 4 WE EN 20 DTR Signal Ground 5 7 Signal Ground Appendix D Int
268. talic character set 1 01H 31H code page selected in the Code Page menu item 2 02H 32H downloadable character set 3 03H 33H graphic character set The national character set selected in the Language Set menu posi tion is valid for all assignments 0 to 3 The code page selected by means of ESC t Pn after the assignment therefore possesses the na tional version selected The copy command for the downloadable character set uses the current code page assignment The assignment 2 is used as standard for selection of the downloa dable character set If it has been overwritten with another assign ment through this command the downloadable character set can no longer be selected The printer must be reset so that the standard assignment is valid again The selection of the national character set is not changed by chan ging the code page assignment If the current code page is selected by means of the command ESC R Pn this code page is assigned to the parameter Pn 1 This code page must therefore be selected with the command ESC t Pn 1 The code page selected with this command sequence contains no national variations however If a national variation is selected with the command ESC R Pn Pn 0 20 64 the code page 437 USA with the previously selected na tional variation is assigned to the parameter Pn 1 The assignment of the code page is reset to the initial setting under the following conditions The printer is reset
269. ter 1 Assembling and setting up Fitting interface cable 1 Plug the printer end of the parallel interface cable into the socket on the back of the printer Secure the cable by means of the two clips Connect the other end of the interface cable to the corresponding socket of your computer Refer to the relevant instructions in your computer manu al Parallel interface cable Connecting the printer to the power supply Caution There is electricity is present and therefore a risk of an electric shock Switch off the printer Plug the power cable into the power socket on the back of the printer Make sure the printer is switched off POWER OFF when doing this Power switch Power cable 1 10 Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up 2 Plug the other end of the cable into an earthed mains outlet sock et 3 Switch on the printer and the computer by means of the respec tive power switches Your printer is now ready for operation Emulation printer drivers In the chapter Printer drivers you will find information on how you can best match the emulation language of your printer to the driver of your application program in order to make full use the functions of the printer How to choose the emulation by means of the printer menu is de scribed in the chapter Printer menu settings Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer Chapter 2 A guided tou
270. ter 34 34 d Ref change to Code A 101 e Ref character X 56 f Ref character Y 57 g Ref character Z 58 Calculation 105 1 12 2 34 3 101 4 56 5 57 6 58 1345 1345 modulo 103 4 1345 103 13 Remainder 6 Checksum is 6 Reference value in Set A If you calculate this checksum yourself you have to send the char acter HEX 26 to the printer in order to obtain the reference value 6 in Set A Table 6 Ref Code Code B Code Value ASCII Hex ASCII Hex Digit Hex 0 Space 20 Space 20 00 30 30 1 21 21 01 30 31 2 5 22 22 02 30 32 3 23 23 03 30 33 4 24 24 04 30 34 5 25 25 05 30 35 6 amp 26 amp 26 06 30 36 7 i mM 27 07 30 37 8 28 28 08 30 38 9 29 229 09 30 39 10 2A 2 10 31 30 11 2 2 11 31 31 12 2C 2C 12 31 32 13 20 20 13 31 33 14 2 2 14 31 34 15 2F 2 15 31 35 Appendix Bar codes Ref Code A Code B Code C Value ASCII Hex ASCII Hex Digit Hex 16 0 30 0 30 16 31 36 17 1 31 1 31 17 31 37 18 2 32 2 32 18 31 38 19 3 33 3 33 19 31 39 20 4 34 4 34 20 32 30 21 5 35 5 35 21 32 31 22 6 36 6 36 22 32 32 23 7 37 7 37 23 32 33 24 8 38 8 38 24 32 34 25 9 39 9 39 25 32 35 26 3A 26 32 36 27 3B 27 32 37 28 lt 3C lt 3C 28 32 38 29 3D 3D 29 32 39 30 gt 3E gt 3E 30 33 30 31
271. ter Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character 0 a 16 128 a 144 1 17 8 129 145 2 18 DC2 130 146 DC2 3 19 DC3 131 0 147 DC3 4 i 20 DC4 132 i 148 DC4 5 21 133 149 6 22 134 150 7 BEL 23 A 135 BEL 151 A 8 BS 24 CAN 136 BS 152 CAN 9 HT 25 U 137 HT 153 10 LF 26 138 LF 154 11 VT 27 ESC 139 VT 155 ESC 12 FF 28 140 FF 156 13 CR 29 141 CR 157 14 SO 30 142 SO 158 15 SI 31 143 SI 159 Line Graphics Expansion Character Set USA ID 437 selected by ESC t SOH ESC 6 Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character 128 136 144 E 152 129 137 145 153 130 138 146 154 131 139 147 155 132 140 148 156 133 141 I 149 0 157 134 142 150 a 158 Pt 135 143 A 151 159 f 17 8 Appendix A Technical Data Appendix A Technical Data Printer narrow model wide model print method printhead ribbon Print Characteristics Characters per inch cpi print speed Characters per second cps at 10 cpi at 12 cpi at 15 cpi at 17 1 cpi at 20 cpi Dot matrix horizontal x vertical Characters per line at 10 cpi at 12 cpi at 15 cpi at 17 1 cpi at 20 cpi Paper feed speed Line spacing fix 80 characters at 10 cpi 136 characters at 10 cpi Impact dot matrix 24 pins 0 2 mm diameter self colouring textile ribbon re inking cartridge 10
272. ter off 2 Move the paper lever at the right side of the printer for wards to the continuous pa per position REAR the symbol on the cover shows the correct position for the lever 3 Feed the continuous paper through the feed slot in the bottom of the printer and up to the level of the platen From above pull the paper upwards beyond the tractor feed A Warning Direct pressure on the platen can cause damage to the print head and pins Make sure the paper guide is correctly adjusted Feeding continuous paper 7 15 Chapter 7 Accessories 4 Release the locking lever for the left sprocket feed and move this to the required po sition Fasten the left roller again with the locking lever 5 Open the cover of the left sprocket feed fit the contin uous paper onto the first two sprocket pins 6 Close the cover again Locking lever Cover of sprocket feed 7 16 Chapter 7 Accessories 7 Now position the right hand sprocket feed in the same way to suit the width of pa per Make sure that the pa per is slightly tensioned 8 Switch the printer on The print head will move to the left end of the platen and the active indicators on the op erator panel will light 9 Fit the new acoustic cover You can set the values for paper handling as you wish by means of the printer menu in the Bot tom F
273. the case until you can feel it make contact It will automatically engage there A clip may be enclosed which is not required for this model a lcm met Be P RUP EIL P 4 Plug the printer end of the interface cable into the sock et on the back of the printer Secure the cable with the two screws 7 29 Chapter 7 Accessories gt Note Make sure that the parallel and serial interface cables are not installed or used at the same time as this can result in malfunction 5 Connect the other end of the interface cable to the appropriate socket of your computer Read the corresponding instructions in your computer manual 6 Switch on the printer again 7 30 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Most printing problems are easy to solve Before calling customer service check the possible causes of faults below Small malfunc tions are usually very easy and quick to remedy yourself Possible faults This summary covers both the fault and possible remedies Ascer tain in which part of the machine the malfunction is located and read the advice described If you are not able to remedy a fault con tact your supplier What I do if nothing happens when I turn on the printer The printer may not be connected to the power supply Check whether the power cable is connected to both the printer and an earthed mains socket the ALARM lamp lights
274. time Only use a clean cloth to clean the control panel and case The oiling and greasing of moving parts by the user is unneces sary If the machine is damaged switch it off and remove the plug from the outlet socket Immediately arrange for it to be repaired Before contacting your supplier s customer service department read the notes in Chapter 6 You may incur costs even during the watranty period if you call on customer service when the cus tomer is expected to remedy the fault or defect himself as described in Chapter 6 When sending off the machine the carrier or insurer will not accept responsibility for damage due to unsuitable packing XIX Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Unpacking the printer The printer is supplied in separate parts in a cardboard box 1 Take the printer and components out of the box 2 Remove the packing material Keep the original packing so that you can transport the printer safely should the need arise later on Check that the individual items supplied are complete and un Checking the items damaged Supplied with the printer are supplied Narrow printer model Printer parts Paper support Platen knob Power cable Ribbon cassette Interference filter depending on model In addition you will need a Centronics interface cable to connect the printer to the computer Ask your supplie
275. timize throughput printing of lines normally takes place al ternately forwards from left to right and backwards short line seeking bidirectional printing In order to improve the alignment of lines lying underneath one another you can stipulate with this function that each line be print ed starting from the left margin unidirectional printing You should use this option when precise vertical alignment of the indi vidual lines is desired bit image graphics IBM graphic characters tables 10 27 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Print suppress End of paper sensor The print speed is somewhat reduced with unidirectional printing as the print head after printing a line is reset to the left margin to start the next line there This function can also be activated for printing bit image graphics via the Graphics menu item Function Dec Hex ASCII Start print 27 81n 1B51n ESC suppress n 36 or for narrow printers n 35 or for wide printers Stop print suppress 17 11 DC1 Printer OFF LINE 27 106 1B 6A ESC j After receiving an ESC Q n the printer ignores all further data ex cept for the command to end print suppress The SEL lamp blinks in print suppress mode After ending print suppress the SEL lamp is lit constantly and the printer is in ON LINE mode With print suppress activated data can continue to be sent to the printer with out being stored or printed these data being suppressed In OFF LINE
276. ting graphic data Set Up 4 11 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Auto CR applies only to IBM emulation CSF Bin Select appears only when an optional cut sheet feeder with two trays is installed SI Select Pitch 10 cpi and SI Select Pitch 12 cpi apply only to IBM emulation Operator Panel Functions Normally all the buttons of the opera tor panel are active but if you choose Limited Operation the but tons PRINT QUALITY CHARACTER PITCH and menu mode are blocked The corresponding functions can then only be controlled by the software This function is particularly suitable for printers being used by one or more persons where the changing of settings is undesirable Hold down the MENU button when switching on to call the menu in Limited Operation mode Reset Inhibit Select Yes if you wish to suppress the initialisation command sent by the software or system This initialisation com mand resets all the functions to the values you have set in the menu Print Suppress Effective If the value Yes is selected in this menu item the commands for print suppression are active in all emula tions If the value No is selected the commands for print suppres sion are ignored Auto LF After selecting Yes the printer automatically adds a line feed each time it receives a carriage return command Check wheth er your computer also adds a line feed If your print outs always have double line spacing you should select No
277. tinuous paper Do not forward paper to the PARK position by using the platen knob If continuous paper is being fed from the rear and you wish to change to cut sheets proceed as follows 1 2 Part the already printed pages along the perforation In ON LINE mode press the PARK button The continuous pa per is transported backwards but remains held in the tractor feed Move the paper lever on the right of the printer to the middle position The symbol for cut sheet handling TOP shows you the correct lever position Raise the paper support Place a sheet of paper on the paper support Adjust the paper guide to the correct width Start by aligning the left edge of the paper to the mark provided The paper is automatically fed in after the time set in the menu If necessary reset the top of form Should you wish to go back to continuous paper when you have finished printing proceed as follows 1 Press the FF LOAD button to eject the cut sheet still in the print er Do not use the platen knob to do this otherwise you will lose the top of form position you have set Move forwards the paper release lever on the right side of the printer the symbol for continuous paper REAR shows you the correct position for the lever Press the FF LOAD button again The continuous paper previ ously removed from the paper path is drawn around the platen again This function is also available when you use an
278. tional spacing This function can also be activated via the Proportional Spacing menu item or via the control panel Proportional spacing is also available via multifunction commands Proportional spacing 10 5 Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions Emphasized enhanced Underline Overscoring Superscript Subscript Print attributes Function Dec Hex ASCII Start emphasized 27 69 1B 45 ESC Stop emphasized 27 70 1B 46 ESC F Start enhanced 2771 1B 47 ESC G Stop enhanced 27 72 1B 48 ESCH With emphasized the dot patterns of the characters are printed horizontally offset with enhanced they are vertically offset Em phasized and enhanced are not available in near letter quality Emphasized and enhanced can be combined to particularly high light selected text Function Dec Hex ASCII Start underline 27 45 49 1B2D31 ESC 1 Stop underline 27 45 48 1B2D30 0 This command causes all printable characters including spaces to be underlined Graphics and spaces skipped by a horizontal tabula tor are not underlined Function Dec Hex ASCII Start overscoring 27 95 49 1B5F31 ESC 1 Stop overscoring 27 95 48 1B 5F 30 ESC _ 0 This command causes all printable characters including spaces to be overscored Graphics and spaces skipped by a horizontal tabula tor are not overscored Function Dec Hex ASCII Start superscript 27 83 48 1B 53 30 ESC 50 Start subscript 27 83 49 1B 53 31 ESC 51 Stop
279. trol the flow of data The bytes are transmitted in succession In the printer s menu you can select and configure the items I Prime Pin 18 and Auto Feed XT To connect the printer to the computer you need a Centronics equivalent parallel cable with the following specifications Amphenol plug 36 pins 57 30360 AMP 552274 1 or equivalent Cover AMP 552073 1 or equivalent Shielded Beldon cable or equiv alent cable with twisted pair conductors The cable should not exceed 2 and must be UL and CSA approved Appendix D Interface Data Pin Description Pin Signal Direction Description 1 DATA STROBE To printer When the signal changes from low to high level input data is sampled 29 DATA 1 8 To printer Input data lines The High level represents 1 the Low level repre sents 0 10 ACKNOWLEDGE From printer The High level of this signal indicates completion of data input or function operation 11 BUSY From printer The High level of this signal indicates that the printer cannot receive data The low level of the signal indicates that the printer is ready for receiving data 12 PAPER END From printer The High level of this signal indicates that a paper end has been detected 13 SELECT From printer The High level of this signal indicates that the printer is in the select mode ON LINE 14 AUTOFEED To printer In EPSON emulation a Low level of the
280. ts of 1 1440 inch This calculation corresponds to the one of m and m Therefore 10 cpi have the following value p 0 p 144 If p and p both equal 0 the actual character pitch is kept Following values for p and p are defined Chapter 10 IBM Standard Functions P P Character pitch 0 0 no change 0 72 20 cpi 0 84 17 cpi 0 96 15 cpi 0 120 12 cpi 0 144 10 cpi r defines whether the proportional typeface is selected In this case has the value2 Is 1a non proportional typeface it is selected Is 0 the last selected item proportional or non proportional it is kept Print modes Function Dec Hex ASCII Character pitch Start 10 cpi 18 12 DC2 Start 12 cpi 27 58 1B 3A ESC Start 15 cpi 27 108 1B67 ESC g Start 15 17 1 cpi 15 OF SI Start 20 cpi 27 15 1B OF ESC SI The pitch is usually measured in characters per inch cpi For ex ample with 10 cpi 10 characters can be printed per inch 2 54 cm Each character then occupies 1 10 of an inch The pitch can also be defined via a multifunction command The function of the command SI for condensed printing mode de pends on the menu items SI Select Pitch 10 CPI and SI Select Pitch 12 CPI Starting from a pitch of 10 cpi a pitch of 15 or 17 1 can be selected with the command SI which can be defined in the menu item SI Select Pitch 10 CPI Starting from a pitch of 12 cpia pitch of 20 cpi can be selected with the command SI i
281. ty 8 240 1920 3264 3 3 CRT I 8 80 640 1088 4 CRT II 8 90 720 1224 6 Single Density 24 60 480 816 8 32 Double Density 24 20 960 1632 9 33 CRT III 24 90 720 1224 38 Triple Density 24 180 1440 2448 11 39 Sexuple Density 24 360 2880 4896 12 40 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics You are properly using the performance of your printer if you choo se one of the 24 pin modes After selecting the required density you can design your graphic and convert it step by step into data for the printer Make sure that 24 pin graphics consist of a number of columns each composing 3 bytes The variables n and n communicate to the printer the total number of bytes including attribute and graphics data which follow the command sequence ESC n n The total number of data bytes consists of a mode byte m and the number of graphic bytes sent to the printer In the case of 24 pin graphics the parameters n and n must take account of the number of graphic bytes determined from the number of graphic columns times 3 and the attribute byte The second command ESC n is only valid in Alternative Gra phics Mode AGM It corresponds precisely to the Epson com mand for high resolution graphics A description of this command and an example are to be found in Chapter 12 128 e 64 eo e e eo 32 Cog Byte 1 16 e 2992 2 16
282. u determine the decimal va lue of a certain pin pattern Position value Binary value 128 27 e 64 26 32 25 e 416 24 e 8 22 4 2 2 2 1 20 93 entered as CHR 93 In the diagram the positions with the values 64 16 8 4 and 1 are intended to be printable dots Only these figures are added together to determine the value for this byte Your printer is capable of representing 8 dot graphics in order also to be able to print graphics which have been created for 9 pin dot matrix printers For this is used a technique in which two pins toge ther correspond to one pin of the 9 pin dot matrix printer in order to achieve a comparable and distortion free image 11 2 Chapter 11 IBM Graphics Since the 8 pin modes correspond to the more common standards they are especially suitable for graphics programs which do not support 24 pin dot matrix printers 24 pin graphics consist of columns each of 3 data bytes which toge ther yield 24 printable graphic dots The individual bytes are calcu lated in the same way as with 8 dot graphics 128 128 x 1 128 64 64x02 0 32 32x1 32 1 16 16 1 16 1 183 8 8x0 0 4 4 1 4 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 128 128x0 0 64 64 1 64 32 22 1 32 2 16 16 1 16 2 118 8 8x0 0 4 4 1 4 2 2 1 2 1 1 0 0 128 128 0 128 64
283. u switch on the printer The alterations you make in the printer menu are stored in the printer and consequently become standard settings They can how ever be changed again by software commands via the operator panel or by resetting the menu The menu options and how to use the menu are described in detail in Chapter 4 Print functions Basic print functions can be adjusted by means of the function but tons described below To do this press the appropriate button until the required indicator lamp lights You can change the functions in both ON LINE and OFF LINE mode PRINT QUALITY COURIER GOTHIC LQ ROMAN __ UTILITY PRESTIGE BOLD 5 52 ___ 10 EX 17 ae In order to change a print function such as Print Quality font type or Character Pitch character width press the correspond ing button until the setting you require is lit This part of the operator panel always indicates the current printer status If a function is affected by a programming command the associated display is also changed Button functions in menu mode Chapter 2 guided tour of the printer PRINT QUALITY Further information on printing speed and print quality is to be found in Appendix A Technical Data CHARACTER PITCH The PRINT QUALITY button enables you to determine the print quality and the font you require for the document to be printed An indicator
284. uided tour of the printer To reset the printer to the settings selected in the menu switch the RESET printer OFF LINE and simultaneously press the buttons SHIFT and RESET The printer switches to ready to print status ON LINE Chapter 3 Paper handling Chapter 3 Paper handling This chapter explains the different ways the printer handles paper feeding setting of printing position changing between different types of paper Notes on paper types Always use good quality standard paper Feeding from Weight Cut sheets Top 52 90 g m Continuous paper Rear bottom Single part 45 90 g m Multi part NCR paper sheet 38 41 g m Multi part with carbon paper sheet 38 45 g m Labels Bottom 34 41 g m Transparencies Top lt 0 1 mm The printer will also handle heavier weight paper sheets multi part paper paper stickers on backing paper etc Recycled paper can also be used provided it matches the general paper specification There may be a slight loss of quality due to the generally rougher quality of the paper Do not use damaged sheets as the paper may be fed in incorrect ly or may cause a jam Unopened packets of paper should be kept flat in a cool dry room until used As soon as a packet is opened the unused paper should be kept in a plastic bag This will protect the paper against ambient moisture In order to ensure fault free handling and the best print qual ity it is best to car
285. w sheet and switch the printer ON LINE again The print out is immediately recom menced 4 1 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings Changing the menu settings On pressing the GROUP button the next group and the first menu item associated with it are output If you simultaneously press the SHIFT button the preceding menu group is selected By means of the ITEM button you can switch to the next menu item within a group If you simultaneously press the SHIFT but ton the preceding menu item is selected Pressing the SET button causes the current setting of a menu item to be changed by displaying and activating the next availa ble value If you simultaneously press the SHIFT button the pre ceding value is printed and activated After setting the required value you can select the next ITEM or next GROUP in order to make changes to the values there After changing all the items you require you can end menu mode by pressing the EXIT button when holding down the SHIFT button and the changes become effective In order to reset the menu to its factory default hold down the two buttons LF and SEL when switching the printer on gt Within menu mode you can print out by means of the PRINT button a complete list of menu items with the current settings Example Ex factory the printer is set to character pitch 10 cpi In order to create a wide table you wish to use character pitch 17 1 cpi Proceed as follo
286. ws 1 The printer is in ON LINE mode First press the SHIFT button hold this down and then press the MENU button Press the GROUP button to switch from the first group Printer Control to the next group Font Press the ITEM button to switch from the first menu item Print Mode to the next menu item Pitch 4 2 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings 4 You can select a value for Pitch Since the first value is 10 cpi you need to press the SET button three times until the value 17 1 cpi appears Hold down the SHIFT button and press the EXIT button The val ues last selected now become effective and the printer returns to print mode Below are summarised the functions for buttons in menu mode Button Function SHIFT MENU Pressing both buttons in ON LINE status activates menu mode GROUP Calls the next group SHIFT GROUP Calls the previous group ITEM Displays the next menu item within the current group SHIFT ITEM Displays the previous menu item within the current group SET Displays the next value of the current item SHIFT SET Displays the preceding value of the current item PRINT Prints out all menu items and the asso ciated settings SHIFT EXIT Ends menu mode End menu mode 4 3 Chapter 4 Printer menu settings The factory defaults for menu items are printed in bold The font LQ Orator can only be selected via the menu and not via the operator panel
287. ws A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving 1 Switch the printer OFF LINE by pressing the SEL button the SEL lamp is extinguished 2 Open the printer cover Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down 7 3 Move the print head to the middle of the platen Chapter 6 Consumables and cleaning 4 Hold the used ribbon cas sette at the top and carefully lift it over the print head Lift cassette over the print head Inserting a new The original ribbon cassettes of the manufacturer s are specially de ribbon cassette veloped for your printer Among other things this concerns the ink which contains lubricants and the fabric of the ribbon A Warning Non original ribbons can damage the print head Use only the original ribbons of the manufacturer A clear ribbon guard is fitted to the front of the cassette Do NOT remove it 1 Take the ribbon out of its plastic packing 2 Place the cassette with the cutout sections onto the pins of the cassette holder Chapter 6 Consumables and cleaning 3 Tilt the cassette carefully down over the print head until you feel it click into place 4 Turn the blue transport knob of the cassette in the direc tion of the arrow to tension the ribbon
288. ws Switch off the printer Open the printer cover Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down If you are using continuous paper tear off the paper already printed If the paper jam occurred at the ribbon guard carefully move the print head to the side Do not undo the screws of the ribbon carriage otherwise this will put the print head out of adjustment Make sure there is no more paper between the ribbon guard and platen Turn the platen knob to eject the paper carefully Now remove all small pieces of paper from the printer The printer is now ready for operation again Chapter 8 Troubleshooting individual dots of the print out are missing The print head may be damaged Contact your supplier the print out appears faint Replace the ribbon cassette with a new one as described in Chapter 6 and adjust the paper thickness correctly If there is no marked improvement in the printing contact your supplier text processing files are printed differently to the settings de fined in the printer menu or operator panel Many application programs send control commands to the printer at the start of and during data transmission This initialisation string contains control characters and commands that set up the printer for the subsequent print job These commands have priority over the settings selected via the operator panel or menu Check in
289. xts output to the screen are simul taneously output to the current printer output device and printed out there If for example the command DIR is entered via the key board the file names of the current subdirectory are output not only to the screen but also to the printer For more detailed information on printing under DOS and the com mands mentioned above please refer to the manual for the operat ing system Chapter 5 Printer Control Entering the control character CTRL P once again switches off print ing of the screen data on the printer Printing under DOS with a serial interface RS 232C When printing under DOS make sure only the transmission proto col Ready Busy hardware handshake is supported Printing with the transmission protocol X ON X OFF software handshake is only possible with software for remote data transfer such as Telix ProCom or MS Windows Terminal Remote data transfer programs of this kind are good for testing in terfaces because it is easy to change or adjust the parameters Note also the following points The settings for the serial interface in the menu of the printer must agree with the settings for the serial interface in the PC e The interface cable must be wired in accordance with the menu options Example The serial interface options in the printer are set at the factory as follows Parity None Serial data 8 bits Protocol Ready Busy Diagnostic Test No Busy Line
290. you align the left edge of the paper To move the paper support back into its horizontal posi tion raise it slightly and fold it down towards the back Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up The paper support must be removed to fit accessories such as the Removing the paper M cut sheet feeder or roll paper stand support 1 Move the paper support into the horizontal home posi tion 2 Press the paper support downwards at the back This will disengage it from its catching arrangement The paper support must be re fitted after removing the acces sory The paper separator The paper separator prevents paper being drawn back into the printer once it has been printed The paper separator has to be removed when you are using a trac The paper separator is fitted tor feed or cut sheet feeder accessory If the printer is to be used to the printer at the factory without either of these accessories the separator must be replaced A Caution The print head moves and can cause injury to the hands Switch the printer OFF LINE and wait until the print head stops moving Chapter 1 Assembling and setting up Caution The print head may be hot and can burn your hands Wait until the print head has cooled down Removing the paper Remove the paper separator separator by holding it on both sides and pulling it gently to wards the front of th

User Manual MICROLINE IBM-/EPSON-compatible

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents